diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/56231-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56231-0.txt | 9424 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9424 deletions
diff --git a/old/56231-0.txt b/old/56231-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index a5517ed..0000000 --- a/old/56231-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9424 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of The "B. O. W. C.", by James De Mille - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: The "B. O. W. C." - A Book For Boys - -Author: James De Mille - -Release Date: December 23, 2017 [eBook #56231] -[Most recently updated: March 5, 2021] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -Produced by: David Widger - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE "B. O. W. C." *** - - - - -THE “B. O. W. C.” - -A Book For Boys - -By Prof. James De Mille - -The Author Of “The Dodge Club,” - -Illustrated - -Boston: Lee And Shepard, Publishers - -1871 - - -THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED TO - -WILLIE - - - - -THE “B. O. W. C.” - - - - -I. - -_The “B. O. W. C.,” with their History, Mystery, and Wonderful Doings; -and how an aged African became elevated to the Dignity of “Grand -Panjandrum.”_ - - -AFTER the long winter session, the approach of the spring vacation -had been eagerly welcomed at the Grand Pré School. It was only a short -recess, and the majority of the boys would not be able to go home; but -such as it was, its advent created the greatest delight. On a pleasant -evening in May the examinations were over; little knots of boys were -gathered jubilantly in various places, bonfires were blazing, squibs -fizzing, crackers snapping, and everything and everybody were as noisy -and as jolly as possible. - -In the midst of all this, and immediately after tea, the “B. O W. C.” - had called a meeting in the Rawdons’ rooms. Who or what the “B. O. W. -C.” is, or was, will be explained on a future occasion; let it suffice -for the present that the “B. O. W. C.” called a meeting, and the -Rawdons’ rooms had the honor, of receiving that august assemblage. Not -that it was very numerous. Only four or five could be counted; but then -what they lacked a number, they made up in quality and in style. The -utmost had been done to bring the rooms up to the level of so great an -occasion. The table had been turned upside down, and transformed into -a dais; the book-case had been, covered over with the table-cloth; the -couch had been placed on one end in the corner; and in the middle of the -room was a flour barrel covered with red flannel, on which was placed a -phrenological bust. Added to this, the room was darkened--a smoky lamp -shedding a feeble and fitful ray over the scene, and dimly disclosing -four figures at one end. - -These four figures were all dressed in white. The costume was a simple, -but a highly effective one. It consisted apparently of a sheet thrown -over the head and falling to the feet, with two holes for the eyes. In -this attire the four figures bore not a little resemblance to some of -those orders of monks which exist in Europe. The table, which lay on the -floor, legs upward, with the addition of the ottoman, served as a dais, -on which stood a figure with an immense militia captain’s sword in his -hand. On each side was also a figure holding a huge wooden battle-axe, -while the fourth stood between the dais and the bust. - -Soon the silence was disturbed by a knock at the door communicating with -the bed-room. The boy near the bust gave it three smart raps, upon which -the door opened, and a figure entered clothed like the others in the -room. On entering he made a low bow, and then stood erect. - -The four figures in the room raised their hands to their faces with a -peculiar gesture. - -“Blood!” said they in solemn tones. - -“Thunder!” said the boy at the door, making the same gesture. - -“Is the Grand Panjandrum with you, Venerable Warden?” said the figure on -the dais. - -“He is, Most Venerable Patriarch.” - -“Let him enter.” - -At this the Venerable Warden left the room, and in a few moments -reappeared, ushering in the personage alluded to as the Grand -Panjandrum. - -The Grand Panjandrum was an aged gentleman of color, whose wrinkled face -was enlivened by an irrepressible comicality of expression, which not -even the solemnity of this occasion could quell. He was arrayed in a -college cap and gown, with a Master’s red hood and long bands. His face -was a study. He was evidently doing his best to exhibit the deepest -solemnity of expression, but his droll, keen, twinkling eyes darted -furtively about, with an intense relish of the scene before him, and his -efforts at gravity were sadly disturbed by the broad grin which, from -time to time, would flash out irrepressibly over the dark background -of his face. After a few furtive glances he bowed; and then, with an -audible chuckle, he awaited further proceedings. - -“Grand Panjandrum,” said the figure on the dais, in an impressive voice. - -“Yes, sah.” - -“Yes, what?” said the other, in a tone of rebuke. - -“Yes, sah,--yes, mos’wossifle,” he added, correcting himself. A grin -broke out over his face, which, however, was instantly checked by a -demure cough. - -“Grand Panjandrum, you have heard our map-dates.” - -“Mandates?” said the other, in a puzzled tone. - -“Yes,--orders.” - -“Yes, sah, mos’ wossifle.” - -“Have you carried out the instructions of the Venerable Brethren?” - -“Yes, sah, mos’ wospeful.” - -“Did you get the turkeys?” - -“Yes, sah.” - -“How many? Six?” - -“No, sah.” - -“What! not six?” - -“No, sah.” - -“How many, then?” - -“Ten,” said the other, with a chuckle and a grin of triumph. - -“O-h!” said the first speaker; while a titter ran round among the -others. “H’m! Very well, and what else?” - -“Spring chickens.” - -“How many?” - -“Twenty.” - -“Ah! Very well. And how?” - -“Broiled, sah.” - -“Any tongue?” - -“Yes, sah, three.” - -“And the ham?” - -“Yes, sah.” - -“Nuts?” - -“Yes, sah.” - -“Raisins?” - -“Yes, sah.” - -“Crackers? Cheese? Figs? Cake?” “Yes, sah, mos’ wossifle.” - -“And what about the drink? Have you prepared the lemonade?” - -“No, sah.” - -“No! Why not?” - -“No lemons, sah.” - -“That’s bad. And there is no drink, then?” - -“Yes. sah. Ginger beer.” - -“Ginger beer. H’m! that will do,” said the Venerable Patriarch, -solemnly. “How much have you?” - -“Ten gallons, mos’ wossifle.” - -“What else have you?” - -“Ten mince pies, twelve apple pies, a basket of tarts, a tin dipper, an -iron pot, an iron spoon,” said the Grand Panjandrum, rapidly enumerating -the various items. “Fact,” he continued, carried away by the ardor of -the moment, “I’se got most nigh eberyting. Gracious sakes! you’ll open -your blessed eyes, mind I tell you! But what are you gwine to do about -de bread and butter? Tell you what, boys! you’ve clean forgot de most -’portant of all.” - -“Silence!” cried the Venerable Patriarch, in an indignant voice, rapping -his sword against the leg of the table. - -“The sakes now! how you _do_ go on!” said the Grand Panjandrum, with a -broad grin. - -“No levity,” said the Venerable Patriarch, in a stern voice. - -“Yes, sah,” said the other, assuming an expression of awful solemnity. - -“Venerable Warden!” - -“Yes, Most Venerable Patriarch.” - -“The audience, is over! Escort the Grand Panjandrum to the outer world.” - -The Venerable Warden bowed, and led the way out, followed by his sable -companion. - -Scarcely had the door closed behind them than the scene underwent a -sudden change. With a shout, the four figures flung off their white -draperies, and kicked them into a corner of the room. Then they drew -back the curtains, replaced the table and couch, while the light that -now came into the room showed the laughing faces of four boys, which had -nothing in common with the sepulchral figures that had taken part in the -late scene. - -Two of these boys were big, brawny, broad-shouldered fellows, with -Roman features, and dark, curling hair. They very closely resembled one -another. These were the two Rawdons, to whom the rooms belonged. The -elder was named Bruce, and the younger Arthur. Of the others, one was -tall and slight, Tom Crawford by name; and the other was small and -slight, and was called Phil Kennedy. - -“Hurrah, boys!” said Phil. “Isn’t old Solomon a perfect brick of an -old darkey? Do you fairly realize the fact that we are to have ten -turkeys,--ten, my boys, instead of six?” - -“And the spring chickens!” said Tom Crawford. - -“And the mince pies!” said Bruce. - -“And the ginger beer!” cried Arthur. - -“The encampment, of the ‘B. O. W. C.’ is going to be a grand success,” - said Bruce. “It will be memorable forever in the history of the school.” - -“We ought to have a grand bonfire, and burn our Latin Grammars, before -starting,” said Tom Crawford. - -“Yes,” said Phil Kennedy, “and our Arithmetics too. I’d like to burn all -the Arithmetics in the world.” - -“No, no,” said Arthur, “don’t let us have a bonfire. Let us have a -burial, with a solemn procession, and a real burial service.” - -“Well, what’ll we bury?” - -“The Latin Grammar.” - -“No, Cæsar.” - -“No, the Arithmetic.” - -“Let’s bury them all; that is the best plan,” said Phil. - -“Yes,” cried all; and a confused medley of proposals arose, in which all -were talking together. In the midst of the uproar the door opened, and -the Venerable Warden made his appearance. Throwing off his white robe, -he disclosed the fair, round face of a fresh, handsome boy, with merry, -mischievous eyes, and curling golden hair. That busy brain of his had -been prolific in all sorts of plans dear to boys, while his generous -nature and frank, pleasant manner made Bart Darner the favorite of Grand -Pré School. - -“O, Bart,” said Tom Crawford, “what about that powder?” - -Bart left the room for a moment, and returned with a package under his -arm. - -“The powder?” said he. “It’s all right. I’ve got it in my room.” - -“And the rods?” - -“Yes, I’ve got the rods too.” - -“Any matches?” - -“Matches? Of course not.” - -“Why, what’ll we do for lights and fires?” - -“I hope you don’t mean to say that you would dream of taking _matches_,” - said Bart, in a voice of solemn rebuke. - -“Why not?” - -“Why not? Who ever heard of matches in an Encampment of Knights? No, -boys, flint and steel is the thing for us. That’s what I’ve got; and -I’ve made some first-rate tinder, and a lot of sulphur lights. Besides, -I’ve got something to surprise you.” - -“What’s that?” - -“The dresses.” - -“Dresses?” - -“Yes; come to my room, and I’ll show you what I’ve got. It wouldn’t do -for us to go out and be brigands in ordinary jackets and trousers, I -hope. Why,” he concluded, in a tone of rebuke, “it would be infamous.” - -“And have you got any dresses in your room?” said Bruce.’ - -“Yes; come along and take a look at them.” - -Off went the five with a shout, and going up a flight of stairs, they -soon entered Bart Darner’s room. Here Bart brought out a bundle from the -bed-room, and opening it, he proudly displayed its contents. There were -five red shirts, each of which had a huge white cross on the back; five -belts; and five felt hats, each of which was decorated with a feather. -As he displayed these articles one by one, the boys were struck dumb -with admiration, while Bart’s eyes glowed with delight. - -“Don’t say anything,” said he, “but try them on.” - -Bart locked the door carefully, and then they all arrayed themselves in -the new costume. Soon five figures stood there with their red shirts and -plunged hats, looking like so many juvenile Garibaldians. - -“You see, these belts will do first rate for pistols, and daggers, and -that sort of thing,” said Bart. - -The other boys said nothing. Astonishment and delight deprived them -of words; but each stood looking, first at himself, and then at his -companions, in mute admiration. - -“But how in the world did you manage it, Bart? Where did you get them -all?” asked Tom Crawford. - -“O, I found the shirts down in Brown’s,” said Bart, “and picked out the -smallest ones. I had them altered, and got Maggie Lunt to sew on the -crosses. I begged some old ostrich feathers from. Mrs. Porter, and of -course the hats could be got anywhere. They’re rather large, but we can -put bits of paper inside the lining, you know, and make them fit well -enough. They’ll do for the woods.” - -“Do for the woods!” cried Bruce Rawdon. “I should think they would, and -for other places, too. Boys, don’t let’s hide our light under a bushel. -I move that we have a grand procession at once.” - -“Yes, yes,” cried all. “Let’s go down now. The fellows are all out on -the grounds.” - -“How they’ll stare!” cried Phil. “The ‘B. O. W. C.’ will become more -famous than ever,” said Tom Crawford. - -“Come, then,” said Arthur, “let us go down now.” - -“No,” said Bart. “That would spoil all.” - -“Why, don’t you want the ‘B. O. W. C.’ to show themselves?” - -“Of course, but not now. I’ll tell you what to do. Let’s wait till -to-morrow, and then we’ll get Jiggins’s cart, and make Solomon drive, -dressed as Venerable Warden, up to the woods. We’ll follow as brigands.” - -“Hurrah! That’s splendid!” said Bruce Rawdon. - -“And I’ll show you something else,” said Bart, taking up the parcel -which he had under his arm in the Rawdons’ room. “I’ve got something -else.” And he proceeded to open the parcel, while the others looked -on with eager expectation. He opened it, and drew out a folded cloth. -Unfolding this, he shook it out, and spread it on the table. It was -a black flag., Upon this was stitched something round, which close -examination showed to be a desperate effort to represent a skull. To -the ordinary observer, however, it looked exactly like an elderly -gentleman’s face, quite bald, and with a benevolent grin. Beneath -it were the mysterious initials “B. O. W. C.” At sight of this, the -long-repressed feelings of the boys burst forth without restraint. With -wild shouts they waved their hats in the air, and at last gave three -cheers for Bart. It was long before their wild excitement could be -quelled. Until late that night they sat in their wonderful dresses, -admiring their wonderful flag, and waiting, with eager impatience, for -the next day. - -But who or what was the “B. O. W. C.”? That I must now proceed to -answer. - -The “B. O. W. C.” arose from the genius of Bart Darner, who, in some -respects, was the most remarkable boy at Grand Pré School. His career -there had been a highly eventful one. His father was a merchant of the -town of St. John, and Bart had gathered, from the atmosphere of his -native place, a passionate desire to go to sea. With the idea of curing -him of this fancy, his father had taken him to Grand Pré School. -Bart had gone very good naturedly, and had been formally entered as a -scholar. The first acquaintances which Bart made were the Rawdon boys; -and on the very first evening after his arrival he confided to them his -determination to quit the school immediately. This determination Bart -was not very long in putting into execution. Two days after his father -had left, Bart was among the missing. Inquiries were made everywhere, -but in vain. At length the worthy head master, Dr. Porter, conjectured -that he might have gone home; so he sent in the direction in which -he supposed it most likely that the fugitive would go. The conjecture -proved to be well founded. Bart was found, on the following day, at an -inn about forty miles away. He made no objection to returning, confessed -that he was on his way home, and made light of the whole affair. -Dr. Porter extorted from him a promise that he would make no further -attempts to go home, and Bart began his school life. - -His restless disposition soon caused a new interruption. At the end of -three weeks it was found that Bart was again missing. Dr. Porter was -deeply hurt, for he feared that Bart had broken his word. Search was -made everywhere, but in vain. A week passed away, but no discovery -had been made. At the end of that time, Old Solomon, the cook of the -boarding school, affected perhaps by Dr. Porter’s deep anxiety, came -to him and disclosed the hiding-place of the fugitive. It appeared that -Bart had struck up an eternal friendship with Solomon, and had gained -his assistance in a new scheme of flight. This time he did not seek to -go home, for he had promised Dr. Porter not to do so. His plan was to -escape to the woods, and build a hut, while Solomon was to bring him -provision and news from the outer world. The Rawdons had been taken -into the secret, and Bart had been enjoying the life of a hermit, and -thoughtlessly amusing himself with baffling the search that was going -on for him. Dr. Porter at once made Solomon accompany him to the -hiding-place; and finding Bart there, he sent Solomon back, and had a -long conversation with the youthful hermit. What he said or did no one -else knew; but his mode of treatment was so effectual, that Bart from -that time forward gave up his wandering ways. A long composition was -allotted him as a punishment, and Bart bore the penalty of his misdeeds -like a man. - -After this he diverted his active powers into a more legitimate -channel, and rapidly became one of the best scholars in his class. His -restlessness of temper and liveliness of disposition showed themselves -in the invention of new games and sports for the amusement of his -companions. He became a curious compound of intense earnestness and wild -levity. In school no one was so utterly absorbed in study as he; and -outside, on the play-ground, no one abandoned himself so completely to -fun and merriment. He took prizes and threw balls with equal facility. -He invented new modes of making balls, of shaping bats, and of fastening -skates. He introduced new variations in the venerable game of marbles. -He made beautiful little schooners. He even constructed a steamboat out -of an old clock. He organized a military company, including all the boys -in the school, with lath guns and wooden swords, and a band which played -jew’s-harps and tin pails. - -But the greatest of all his achievements was the organization of the “B. -O. W. C.” - -It arose-on this wise. - -From the very outset he had formed a close connection with four other -boys, and the attachment to one another grew stronger among them every -day. After organizing his militia company, and adding to it its famous -“Tin Band,” Bart looked around him for more worlds to conquer; in other -words, for new ideas to put into practice. In a moment of inspiration he -conceived the plan of a secret society, which was to include himself -and his friends. No sooner was this suggested to the others, than they -seized upon it with the greatest eagerness. The name was the first -thing. At first they thought of calling it the “Pentagon.” Then they -thought of the “Quintette.” Other names suggested themselves; but -finally they decided upon the “B. O. W. C.” The use of letters gave -a charming mystery. No one but a member of the society could ever -penetrate the tremendous secret. But the time has at length come for -divulging it. It shall be a secret no longer. Those mysterious letters, -then, were intended to represent “_The Brethren of the Order of the -White Cross_.” - -As to the rest, the most charming ingenuity was shown in arranging the -details. The officers had names of solemn import. They were,-- - -1. The Most Venerable Patriarch. - -2. The Venerable Scribe. - -3. The Right Worshipful Commander. - -4. The Grand Scholastic. - -5. The Venerable Warden. - -Afterward another dignity was added. - -It was arranged that each office should be held only for one month. This -was calculated to satisfy the aspirations of all, since in this way each -member had a chance of filling every office in due time. - -The initiation ceremonies were tremendous; the only trouble about these -being that they never had any persons on whom to exercise them. They -remained, therefore, like so many beautiful dreams. The costumes have -already been described. The most important thing among their furniture -was the phrenological bust. This was the pride and delight of the “B. O. -W. C.” It had been obtained from a young man who was studying medicine -in the village, and who levied a heavy tax upon the purses of the -society for so precious an article. They had the bust, however, and did -not complain. - -I have said that another dignity was added to the original five. This -was in the person of the venerable Solomon. In consideration of his age, -his color, his occupation as cook, and his eminent previous services to -all of them individually, it was unanimously resolved that he should be -admitted to the society. With very great delicacy they excused him the -terrific initiation ceremony. Perhaps the idea that he might object -to some of the details influenced them in this. Be this as it may, Old -Solomon became a member, and a new dignity was created especially for -him. In a full meeting of the society, it was unanimously voted that he -be created _Perpetual Grand Panjandrum_. - - - - -II. - -_Grand Pré and Minas Basin.--An astonishing Procession.--Encampment of -Brigands.--Break-up of Encampment and Flight of the Inmates._ - - -THE Grand Pré Academy, under the presiding care of Dr. Porter, was a -highly popular and very efficient boarding school. In choosing such a -place for the Academy, Dr. Porter had shown that ardent love of nature -which always distinguished him. It was situated in a place which yields -to no other in the world for varied charms of land, sea, and sky, and -which can never be forgotten after it has once been seen. Standing -upon the slope of a hill, the Academy, with its broad portico and lofty -cupola, looked down upon a scene whose loveliness has been described in -Longfellow’s exquisite verse: - - “In the Acadian land, on the shores of the Basin of Minas, - - Distant secluded still, the little village of Grand Pré - - Lay in the fruitful valley. Vast meadows stretched to the - - eastward, - - Giving the village its name, and pasture to flocks without - - number. - - Dikes that the hands of the farmers had reared with labor - - incessant, - - Shut out the turbulent tides; but at stated seasons the flood - - gates - - Opened, and welcomed the sea to wander at will o’er the - - meadows. - - “West and south there were fields of flax, and orchards and - - cornfields. - - Spreading afar and unseened o’er the plain; and away to the - - northward. - - Blomidon rose, and the forests old; and aloft on the moun - - tains - - Sea-fogs pitched their tents, and mists from the mighty - - Atlantic - - Looked on the happy valley, but ne’er from their station de - - scended.” - -Looking from the portico of the Academy, the eye rested upon a broad -expanse of dike land immediately in front, which extended far away -for many miles on either hand. These the old Acadian farmers had first -reclaimed from the sea, and afterward their successors had reared new -dikes and reclaimed wider districts. The broad meadows immediately in -front were bounded by the Cornwallis River, a stream which at high tide -can float the largest ship, but which at low tide is so nearly empty -that but a slight rivulet runs through its channel. It runs into the -Basin of Minas, where are the highest tides in the world.. Here the sea -carries in its salt waves up to where the dikes rise against them, and -afterward retreating, they go back for miles, leaving vast tracts of mud -flats exposed to the view. For many miles all around there are rivers -that run into this bay, all of which are subject to the same tides, -and experience the same great vicissitudes, changing twice in the -twenty-four hours from shallow rivulets at the bottom of valleys of mud, -to vast rivers which flow with swift and full streams. Twice on each day -the stream, which can scarce float a canoe, will grow to a mighty -volume of water, where navies might pass. Twice each day may be seen -the startling spectacle, once used as a formula for the impossible, of -rivers running from the sea up their channels; and twice on each day the -scene on Minas shores changes from a wide expanse of red mud to a vast -sheet of deep-blue sea. - -All that is wonderful and all that is sublime in nature may be found -here, side by side with all that is most sweet and beautiful. Behind the -hill on whose slope the school stands lies the valley of the Gaspereaux, -an Eden-like retreat, shut in by high hills and watered by a winding -river, sequestered from the world, full of that strange charm of repose -that may so seldom be met with in this busy age. Before the hill there -spreads away for many a mile the broad vale of Cornwallis, through which -there flow five rivers, whoso waters are all chained up at their mouths, -so that their beds may serve for verdurous dike lands to the farmers of -the valley. Far away on the other side extends a long range of hills, -which push themselves forward into Minas Basin till they end in a -precipitous cliff, whose towering form is the centre of attraction for -many and many a mile. This is the famous Cape Blomidon, whose position -is so peculiar, and whose shape is so striking, that it forms the -central object to spectators all around the shores of the bay. Here is -a channel opening into the Bay of Fundy outside, and this channel is -the gate-way through which the disturbed and impetuous waters of the two -seas forever rush backward and forward. - -In that outer bay there are fierce tides, and swift currents, and -iron-bound shores, and lonely rocky isles; there are dense fogs, sharp -squalls, and sudden storms. The mists that prevail there are kept away -by that lofty wall which terminates in Blomidon, and cannot penetrate -into the well-protected country within. The mists and the fogs seem like -baffled enemies, long beleaguering, but never victorious. From the sunny -plains of Cornwallis and Grand Pré they may be seen crowded and piled -up on the top of Blomidon, frowning darkly and menacingly upon the scene -beneath, as though eager to descend. But Old Blomidon guards well the -land which he protects, and the mist and the fog that cross his crest -are broken and dissipated into thin air. - -From all this there arise wondrous atmospheric effects. Here, when the -fog is piled up in gloomy masses over Blomidon, and the sun is setting -behind them, may be seen a spectacle so gorgeous that, if it could be -portrayed on canvas, few would believe it to be a copy of nature. It -would be deemed the fantastic vision of some artist mad from love of -deep gloom and vivid color; for the colors here at sunset are sometimes -as numerous, as varied, and as vivid as those of a rainbow. The whole -west glows with indescribable glory, when out of black clouds and -voluminous folds of whirling fog-wreaths there beams a gorgeous red, -forth from which shoot up innumerable rays far into the zenith, formed -of every hue and shade, which shift and change like the rays of the -Aurora Borealis, and cast upon all the sky and upon all the earth -something of their own splendid radiance. - -Early on the morning which followed the meeting of the “B. O. W. C.,” - a singular scene was presented in front of the Academy. A crowd had -gathered there surrounding a very remarkable group. There was a cart -containing a number of baskets and some pots, in which was harnessed a -quadruped which charity might consent to name a horse, but which looked -more like a skeleton of one of the extinct species. Seated high and dry -in an old arm-chair was the venerable figure of Solomon in his robes of -office, that is to say, his office of Perpetual Grand Panjandrum. He had -an old college cap and gown, and a master’s hood, while the spectacles -that bestrided his nose, and the altitude of his shirt collar, were of -themselves sufficient to strike awe into the beholder. Behind the cart -were the “B. O. W. C.,” robed in the red shirts and plumed hats which -Bart had found for them. Bart had a pistol in his belt. Each one had -something, if it were nothing better than a case-knife. But the centre -of all eyes was the flag. This Bart had generously handed over to Bruce -Rawdon, who was the Most Venerable Patriarch for the month of May. As -the wind caught it and unfolded it before the astonished eyes of the -other boys, the skeleton head grinned benignantly at them from his airy -home, and a loud shout of admiration burst forth from all. - -Solomon cracked his whip. The procession started. The noise, the -laughter, and the joking were wonderful. Heads appeared at all the -windows of the house where the teachers lived. There were the laughing -faces of Dr. Porter and his family; there was the wondering gaze of Mr. -Simmons, the mathematical teacher; and there, at another window, the -long, solemn physiognomy of Mr. Long, of the English department. Thus -the procession went on, followed by all the boys, and the centre of -admiring interest. It was a proud moment for the “B. O. W. C.” - -In this fashion they went up the hill behind the Academy, and at length -reached the woods. They passed several cavities in the ground which -had once been cellars of the old Acadian houses. They passed through an -orchard where the old, neglected apple trees still spoke of the Acadian -farmer who had planted them and cleared the forest around. - -The road entered the woods, and they went along for some distance. At -last, in the midst of the woods they turned aside to the left, and after -a hundred yards or so they stopped, and the cart was unloaded. - -At this place there was a steep descent on the right through the thick -woods. Down this the “B. O. W. C.” carried the articles which they had -brought. On reaching the bottom, they emerged into a space clear of -trees, where a brook ran babbling on. About twenty yards up, a dam had -been built, and a pond of water formed, at one end of which was a large -camp made of spruce and fir. Shut in among the woods, with the little -pond in front of it, and the brook babbling behind it, it formed -as secluded a place as could be desired. This spot was once the -hiding-place of Bart during his second flight, and had ever since been -a favorite resort of his. There were many camps and pleasant arbors -through the woods, but the newly-made pond had given to this place the -undoubted preeminence. It had all been done very secretly within a week, -and all the other boys now saw it for the first time, and gave utterance -to their feelings in low murmurs of surprise and admiration. But the “B. -O. W. C.” had much to attend to. First of all, they had to carry down -their provisions. Then they had to arrange them, and finally they had -the most important duty of all to attend to, which was no less momentous -a thing than hoisting their flag. Soon the moment came. A pole had been -already prepared. The ropes were attached, the pole was nailed to a -corner post of the camp, and the flag was hauled up to its place with -loud cheers, in which all the other boys joined with the greatest vigor. - -After this the “B. O. W. C.” flung themselves down and rested for a -time. The other boys inspected the place closely, and questioned the -owners of the camp as to their intention. - -“Are you going to sleep here?” - -“O, yes.” - -“What’ll you sleep on?” - -“Brush, of course.” - -“And will you cook?” - -“O, yes.” - -“Have you a fireplace?” - -“No, but we’re going to make one to-day.” - -“What’ll you do if it rains?” - -“Grin and bear it.” - -“Pooh! You don’t mean to say that you’d stay here if you got wet -through.” - -“Wouldn’t we, though? You see.” - -“Dr. Porter wouldn’t let you.” - -“O, yes, he would. He always says it don’t hurt boys to get wet.” - -“O, he means by day. He wouldn’t let you sleep here in a storm.” - -“Why not? The camp is good enough.” - -“Good enough? It can’t keep the rain off.” - -“O, yes, it can.” - -“You haven’t enough to eat here--have you?” asked others. - -“Plenty.” - -“Nonsense! It will all be gone before two days.” - -“Well, can’t we easily get things? I’ve got a pistol, and mean to shoot -hares and things.” - -Bart proudly displayed his pistol, and the sight of this formidable arm -silenced all controversy. - -“Besides,” said Bart, proudly, “we’ve got a gun.” - -“A gun!” repeated the others, in low tones. “Yes; we expect to be -attacked.” - -“Attacked? Who’d attack you?” - -“O, the Gaspereaugians.” - -(“The Gaspereaugians” was a name given by the boys to the inhabitants of -Gaspereaux.) - -“Do you think they will?” - -“Of course; but if they try it, they’ll find us ready for them,” - said Bart, fiercely. “We’ve hoisted our flag, and I’d like to see the -Gaspereaugian that would dare to pull it down.” - -“Well, if it comes to that, you’ve got us, you know. We’ll be on hand.” - -“Of course,” said Bart, gravely. “I’ll tell you what we’re going to do: -we’ll send out scouts, and if we see any signs of an attack, we’ll let -you know. I’ve got a trumpet here, and when I blow three times, you’ll -be along to help. See.” - -And Bart stepped back to a bundle, out of which he pulled a long tin -horn, of the kind known among ‘longshoremen as “fog-horns.” - -“But we won’t blow it till we’re hard up, you know,” he continued. -“We’ll only blow it if they come in a great crowd, you know.” - -“O, yes; of course.” - -The boys now broke up into little knots, and proposed all sorts of -plans. A mania for camping out set in strong among them all. The example -of the “B. O. W. C.” in damming the stream was to be imitated at once. -Each little knot of boys had places peculiar to themselves along the -same stream, some of which were the work of predecessors, and had -something like a history. After a time most of the boys went back for -spades, pickaxes, shovels, axes, and whatever else might be needed for -the great work of camp-building. The “B. O. W. C.” then turned their -attention toward the completion, of their own camp. A fireplace -had still to be built, and brush cut for beds. To this they devoted -themselves very vigorously, and worked till about ten o’clock, when -their labors were suddenly interrupted by the appearance of Dr. Porter -and Mr. Simmons. They stood for some time looking with a smile at the -busy scene, before they were noticed. As soon as the boys recognized -their visitors, they came up laughing, eager to describe the beauties -of their camp. Dr. Porter was much amused, particularly with the flag, -which floated from the mast. - -“Boys,” said he at length, after he had asked about everything, “I have -come up to make you an offer.” - -“An offer? What is it, sir?” cried they all. - -“How would you like to give up, for the present, your bandit camp, take -away all your provision, haul down your flag, and go away?” - -“What, sir!” cried the boys in consternation, and a cloud of gloom -passed over their-faces. - -“How would you like me to charter a little schooner, fill it with -provisions, turn the hold into a sleeping-place, and start off for -a week’s cruise around the Basin of Minas, going ashore at the Five -Islands, at Parrsboro’, at Blomidon, and at any other, place where we -might wish? What do you say to that? Ah, ha!” cried the doctor, as he -watched the changing faces of the boys, where the gloom had vanished -instantly, and given place to the wildest delight. “Ah, ha! that suits -you--does it! Well, that’s what I’ve come to propose.” - -“O, Dr. Porter! Are you really in earnest? Do you mean it?--a -schooner--a schooner?--a cruise round Minas Basin? O, good! good! good! -Hurrah! Three cheers!” - -A hundred incoherent shouts and words like these burst from the boys as -they dashed about in wild and frantic delight, overwhelmed with joy at -this proposal to all of them. It seemed a thing so glorious that nothing -of which the mind could conceive was to be compared with it. A cruise -round Minas Basin! What did not that involve? Adventures of a hundred -kinds; drifting about in wild tides; getting lost in dense fogs; running -ashore on wide mud flats, or on precipitous cliffs, or on the edge of -perilous breakers; landing on lonely headlands, or on solitary islands; -penetrating far forests; camping out in wildernesses; living pirate -fashion in their own schooner, where all would be given up to them; -shooting, fishing; hunting for gulls’ nests;--it meant not sham -adventures, but real ones--with real dangers environing them instead of -fancied ones. They could cease playing at Robbers, and play what to them -seemed the nobler part of Pirates; the skull-and-cross-bones flag could -adorn the schooner, and the fog-trumpet could sound forth amid the -echoing cliffs of Blomidon. It meant anything and everything, and far -more than even their vivid fancies could very well portray. To most boys -the sea always promises more adventure than the land; there is always -something of the joy of discovery in every new voyage, and so all -these boys felt now; but to Bart, most of all, was the prospect most -delightful; for he had already known to the full that longing for the -sea which many boys have, and that which his father had prevented him -from realizing, now seemed to come to him. In some respects this seemed -to be better than the voyage which he had formerly dreamed of; for -though it would not be long, yet it would be varied and eventful, and -not free from danger. Best of all, it would be made in company with the -other boys. - -It was some time before the boys were able, in their excitement, to -get any clear idea of what Dr. Porter was telling them. At length they -learned that Mr. Simmons and Mr. Long wished to visit Blomidon and the -Five Islands in search after minerals, with which the cliffs are filled. -They had concluded to get a schooner, and take the larger boys -with them. They expected to spend about a week, and take provisions -sufficient for that time. Dr. Porter would not be able to go himself, -but would intrust the boys to the care and the jurisdiction of Messrs. -Simmons and Long. Such was the plan. - -Moreover, the schooner was already engaged. It was the Antelope, Captain -Corbet; and it was proposed to leave, if possible, that very afternoon, -so as to be on the other side of the bay, or at least near Blomidon, -by sundown. As it was then ten o’clock, there was no time to lose, but -everything should be prepared at once, and taken on board the schooner. -One thing only was insisted on by Dr. Porter; and that was, that they -should take no firearms. Bart pleaded so hard for his little pistol, -however, that the doctor let him keep it, and satisfied himself by -making them leave the gun behind. - - - - -III. - -_Another extraordinary Procession.--An eccentric Crew.--A -flighty Shipper.--Wonderful Attachment of Captain, Corbet to his -Offspring.--Stealing a Stone Fence, and raising the Black Flag._ - - -SOON the woods were deserted. Twelve or fifteen boys were selected as -worthy of the adventurous voyage, and these all made their preparations, -while the smaller boys looked on with longing eyes. As for the “B. O. -W. C.,” they had no preparations to make. They needed only to transfer -their provisions and other things from the camp to the schooner. -The teachers were to see about the bedding, &c. These boys therefore -enlisted Old Solomon in their service, and packed their things once -more in the same cart which had taken them to the camp; after which they -waited to accompany the others to the schooner. All possible haste was -made; and soon there started for the schooner a procession even more -extraordinary than the one which had gone into the woods. - -First of all went a huge hay-cart crammed with bedding; then followed a -wagon filled with provisions; and after this the cart of the “B. O. W. -C.,” driven by Solomon. Then followed the voyageurs in procession; and -after these came the small boys, green with envy. Messrs. Simmons and -Long walked modestly on the sidewalk, not caring to identify themselves -with so odd a crowd. - -In fact it was an odd crowd. First there was Solomon in full canonicals, -then the “B. O. W. C.” in their red shirts and plumed caps, with axes -and knives in their belts; and then followed their companions in the -voyage, dressed more grotesquely still. All the old clothes that could -be found were pressed into service for this occasion. Old pea-jackets, -old “sou’-wester” hats, old coats denuded of skirts, jackets in a state -of dilapidation, battered caps, shocking bad hats, which had not been on -a human head for ever so long,--all were now brought into requisition, -and formed an assemblage which was sufficient to drive an “Old Clo’” man -wild with covetousness. - -Now, as Homer, at the outset of his poem, enumerates the ships and -chieftains, so will I complete the enumeration of the voyageurs in this -adventurous expedition. - -First, then, there came a little Irishman, who had accidentally dropped -into the Academy, and had remained. His name was Michael Murphy, and -consequently he was always called Pat, except when the boys called him -Patsie,--for short, as they said. He wore an old sky-blue dress-coat, -with three brass buttons still remaining, fastened around the waist with -a red woollen comforter. A battered silk hat, with the top of the crown -off, completed his costume. - -With him came Peter Fraser, commonly known as Johnnie Blue, a thick-set, -bullet-headed boy, full of obstinate, persevering courage, and dressed -in a sailor’s pea-jacket, made to fit himself by the simple plan of -cutting off the sleeves. He wore a sou’wester, and carried a sailor’s -knife. In fact, his get-up was very remarkably nautical. - -Then came David Digg, a tall, solemn, pale boy, very studious, with -a taste for geology. He wore an old overcoat minus the tails, and a -knitted yarn night-cap. David Digg was always called Bogud by the boys, -from the fact that in one of the rules of the Latin Grammar they had -learned that “David and Bogud are common.” - -Then came George McLeod, whose name was facetiously contracted into -Muckle. By some extraordinary means he had obtained possession of a -soldier’s red coat, and produced an immense sensation. - -Then came Jacob Wiggins, whose name was easily contracted into Jiggins, -by which name alone he was known. He wore a red bandana handkerchief -around his head, and was arrayed in a big gray homespun coat, which he -had borrowed from a friendly farmer. - -After these marched William MacNamara, known as Billymack, wearing a -tail coat, long top boots, and a felt hat. - -And last, there was George Henderson, who had gained the singular name -of Sammy Bam Ram, which occurs in one of Dr. Bird’s novels, from some -amusing incident in his school life. A very old jacket, a very ragged -pair of trousers, and a hat on the extreme verge of decrepitude, formed -his attire. - -The chief harbor of Grand Pré now goes by the name of Mud Creek, and is -one of the many examples which go to prove that the Anglo-Saxon, though -superior to the Frenchman in colonizing a new country, is very far his -inferior in giving names to the places which he may have colonized. At -this place the party soon arrived, and looked for the vessel. To their -surprise, they found her quite deserted, lying aground at a wharf. On -going aboard, they found that no preparations whatever had been made. - -“This is too bad!” cried Mr. Long, in tones of deep vexation. “Corbet -promised to be here early, and have everything ready. I wonder what can -have become of him.” - -Saying this, he started off to try and find Captain Corbet. After about -half an hour he returned. - -“I’ll tell you what it is,” he said; “we can’t afford to wait. We _must_ -begin right away and make our arrangements.” - -“There’s no ballast on board,” said Mr. Simmons, who had been carefully -inspecting the vessel, “and no floor in the hold.” - -“What!” cried Mr. Long; and hurrying on board, he soon saw that such was -indeed the case. He then stood for a time vexed and perplexed. - -“Well, boys,” said he at length, “we must all get to work, so that we -may be ready when Corbet does come. There’s a pile of stones over there -which will do very well for ballast;” and he pointed to a stone wall -which surrounded a garden close by the wharf. “Now come, boys,” he -continued, “form a line from the stones to the schooner, and pass them -all along from hand to hand.” - -“But it’s Mr. Brown’s fence,” objected Mr. Simmons, who did not relish -this infringement on the rights of another. - -“O, Mr. Brown won’t mind!” was the reply. - -“He knows me. Come, boys;” and Mr. Long, who was always rapid and -energetic, soon formed the boys in line, and the stones were speedily -transferred from hand to hand. - -“Mr. Simmons,” said Mr. Long, after a time, “I think I’ll go and get -some boards.” And saying this, he hurried away, leaving the others hard -at work, and expecting the absent Corbet. The boys worked with a will; -and even the smaller ones, who were to have no part in the voyage, -formed another line, and passed on the smaller stones. At the end of -two hours the vessel was considered by Mr. Simmons to have sufficient -ballast, the garden wall had vanished, and the boys stood waiting, with -blistered hands, for Captain Corbet. - -While they were waiting, Mr. Long once more appeared. - -“What! hasn’t Corbet come yet?” he cried. - -“No.” - -Mr. Long looked around in despair. - -“I’ve had to go three miles for the boards,” said he. “They’ll be here -in a few minutes. Everything is against us to-day. We’ve got to work -hard yet, or we won’t get off. Mr. Simmons, would you be kind enough to -go and see if you can find Corbet in the village? and I’ll go down into -the hold to lay the flooring.” - -Off went Mr. Simmons, and down went Mr. Long into the hold. The wagon -soon arrived with the boards, which were passed down to him, and -speedily laid over the ballast. Thanks to his skill and energy, the -floor was soon made. Then the boys set to work throwing down the -bedding, and arranging the trunks and baskets. There was not much time, -however, for any arrangements. The things lay in a confused heap, with a -busy crowd laboring to reduce them to order. - -At the end of about half an hour Mr. Simmons returned, shaking his head. -He had not found Captain Corbet. Things began to look desperate. It was -now high tide, and high time for leaving. Time and tide, which wait for -no man, were not going to wait for Captain Corbet. - -There was the Antelope all ready. She was not much of a vessel, it is -true. She resembled a wash-tub in many important points. She looked -leaky. She smelled strong of potatoes; and rightly so, for that -important vegetable formed her invariable cargo. The name Antelope was a -delightful jest. Her chains were deeply eaten with rust; her cordage -and rigging had a time-worn appearance. A venerable air of decay rested -about her. Yet still, in spite of all, there she was, and a dozen eager -young hearts were burning to embark in her, and be away before the tide -should fall. - -At last Mr. Long started off, in company with Mr. Simmons, to hunt up -Captain Corbet, or some other man who might go in his place. The boys -stood about the wharf waiting impatiently for their return. - -Mr. Long and his companion hurried to the village inn, and found out -that Captain Corbet lived three miles away. So they borrowed a horse and -wagon, and drove off as fast as possible to the house. Arriving there, -they entered, and beheld a scene which so overpowered Mr. Long that for -a time he could not speak. - -[Illustration: 0050] - -For there in his kitchen, in a high-backed chair, in front of his own -hearth-stone,--there sat the identical Captain Corbet for whom so many -had been waiting so long. He held an infant in his manly arms, he was -gently tilting his chair to and fro, and tenderly feeding his prattling -innocent with a spoon. So intent was he upon his tender task, that he -did not hear the entrance of his excited pursuers. - -“Captain Corbet!” - -The tone in which Mr. Long spoke cannot possibly be represented in -print; or at any rate to do so would require more notes of admiration -than are usually found in any common printing office. The tone will -have to be imagined. Suffice it to say, that Captain Corbet dropped the -spoon,--almost dropped the baby also,--and started to his feet as though -he had been stirred up by a galvanic shock administered full on the -ganglionic centres. - -“Captain Corbet!” cried Mr. Long, furiously. “Didn’t you say you’d be on -the wharf in good time, and that the Antelope would leave at this tide?” - -“Why! it’s Mr. Long!” said Captain Corbet. “Why, Mr. Long! Glad to see -you. Sit down. Why, you railly frightened me. Why, I’m railly pleased to -see you. I am, railly.” - -“What do you mean,” cried Mr. Long, in a great passion, “by this -mockery? Here have we been waiting for you ever since morning, and we’ve -had to put the ballast on board with our own hands; and I come here and -find you quite indifferent. What do you mean, sir? Are you going, or -not?” - -“Good gracious!” said Captain Corbet. “The ballast! Why, railly now! Did -you go and put it on board? Why, I do declare!” - -Mr. Long gave a dark frown, and with a violent effort smothered his -indignation. - -“Are you coming, or not?” said he, sternly. - -“Coming? Why--not jest now. You see there’s the babby.” - -And he put his brown finger under the chin of his offspring, and -actually forgot himself so far as to whistle to it; after which he cast -a furtive glance at his visitors, as though half expecting that they -would admire the child. - -“Where’s Mrs. Corbet? It’s _her_ place to mind the child--your place is -on board the vessel.” - -“Why, I can’t put the babby on the floor, as I see; nor I can’t take him -on board.” - -“Where’s Mrs. Corbet?” - -“Why, you see, she started off airly to hunt up some parygolic. The -babby’s troubled with wind, and--” - -“When will she be back?” interrupted Mr. Long. - -Captain Corbet shook his head solemnly. - -“It would take a man with a head as long as a horse to tell that,” said -he, sententiously. - -“Where is she then? I’ll drive off and get her.” - -“She! law bless you, I don’t know no more’n a onhatched chick.” - -“Don’t know! You surely know which way she went.” - -“Wal, she kind o’ tho’t she’d go to the village, and then she kind o’ -hinted she’d visit her married sister that lives on Billy Jackson’s -farm. They’re down with the measles, and--” - -“Bother the measles! Do you mean to say that you let her go off, and -quietly sat down here to nurse your baby, when you ought to have been at -work?” - -“I didn’t let her go. She walked off herself. ‘Benjamin,’ says she, -‘take care of the babby.’ He’s dreadful fond of me. Won’t be fed by -nobody else. I ginrally feed him at nights when he wakes. An’ a dreadful -high-sperited creetur is that child’s mother. An’ they shan’t abuse -him. No-o-o-o,” he added, abruptly, turning his conversation toward the -“babby” himself, who began to make faces and utter sounds premonitory of -a howl. - -Mr. Long turned abruptly away. - -“The man’s an idiot!” said he to Mr. Simmons. “We’ll have to get some -one else to go with us.” - -“See here,” said he, turning to Captain Corbet, who was stirring up some -pap to feed his “babby;” - -“I’ve engaged your schooner, and I mean to start in her. All our -things are on board, and we can’t lose a whole day. You’ve broken your -engagement; so I’ll go without you. I’ll find somebody that can sail -her. I’ll go to Captain Pearson, or old McNeil, or somebody.” - -“There ain’t a skipper in the place. You won’t find anybody. I’m the -on’y schooner here. Everybody is got off to Bosting with taters. I’d -been off, too, on’y for the babby.” - -“Well, when can you go?” - -Captain Corbet shook his head. - -“O, it’ll be all right. I’ll be along--some time. I dare say Mrs. Corbet -’ll be home soon. Don’t be alarmed about me. I’ll put you through.” - -“See here, Captain Corbet; I’ll go off now and find somebody to take me. -You’ve deceived me, and disappointed me.” - -Saying this, Mr. Long strode out of the house, followed by his -companion, and drove away rapidly in search of some one to navigate the -schooner. - -All his efforts were vain. It was as Captain Corbet said. There wasn’t -any one in the place. Every seafaring man had gone off in some kind of -potato craft to Boston, allured by the high prices of potatoes. Fortunes -were being made, and nothing but the desperate imbecility of Corbet -prevented him from having his share in the golden harvest. Time passed. -The tide fell rapidly, and the vessel was again left aground by the -retreating waters. It would be necessary to postpone their departure -until the following day, for they did not care about starting in the -night. - -There was no help for it. They would have to wait. Mr. Long went up -again to see Captain Corbet, and extorted from him a promise to leave -at nine o’clock on the following morning. Before he left he had the -satisfaction of seeing Mrs. Corbet arrive home, and got her to promise -that her husband should go. As this was the only thing that could be -done, he went back to make known the state of the case to the boys. - -As to the boys, though disappointed, they were not at all cast down. -They had possession of the vessel, with beds and provisions, and on the -vessel they were bound to remain. Mr. Long found that they had eaten -an excellent dinner, and were preparing their evening repast in the -schooner’s hold, which they now considered their home. They did not want -to go to the Academy to eat or to sleep. They were navigators, and their -life was on the ocean wave, their home on the rolling deep. - -So they passed the night on board, and found the first experience of -wild life very pleasant. Songs and laughter arose until late, and it was -midnight before the merry voices ceased to rise into the still air. - -Early the next morning Mr. Long was down, and found that the boys had -already finished breakfast, and were eagerly awaiting the next turn in -the proceedings of the day. He communicated to them his anxieties about -Corbet, and gave them to understand that they might not get off at all, -unless they could secure the dawdling skipper. He urged them all to -accompany him to Corbet’s house, so as to bring a moral power to bear -which he would not be able to withstand. - -This proposal the boys received with three stunning cheers. - -Off, then, started all the boys, headed by Mr. Long, who, in his -excitement, no longer cared about the ragged regiment at his heels. For -three good miles they footed it bravely, and at length stood in front of -Captain Corbet’s door. Mr. Long entered, and found the navigator seated -in his kitchen by the fireplace, dandling the babby. The wife of his -bosom was setting the breakfast table. - -“Good morning,” said Mr. Long. - -“Why, it’s Mr. Long! Railly now,” said Captain Corbet. “An’ it shall see -Mr. Long, too,--so it shall,” he continued, holding up the babby, who -fastened its large blue eyes upon the visitor. - -Mr. Long turned away, and spoke aside with Mrs. Corbet. Rightly -considering that she was the true head of the house, he begged her -not to let them be disappointed again. He was successful. Mrs. Corbet -assured him that the moment breakfast was over she would send him off. - -“And we will wait,” said Mr. Long. - -So they waited patiently; and at last Captain Corbet tore himself away -from his house, his wife, and his babby, and went to the schooner, -accompanied by the ragged regiment of boys. - -It was about ten o’clock, and the schooner was afloat. All tumbled on -board. The hawswrs were unloosed. Captain Corbet had to go ashore to -get a man whom he called his “mate;” but as Mr. Long went with him but -little time was lost. - -At last the sails were hoisted. The wind filled them, and the Antelope -moved slowly from the wharf. A loud, ringing cheer arose as the schooner -started. Before the last notes died away, however, a man was seen -running down toward the wharf. He was short and fat, and panted heavily. -Reaching the wharf, he cast one look of consternation at the place where -the garden wall had been, and another at the schooner. - -“They’ve done it, by jingo!” he exclaimed. “Hallo there!” he screamed. -“Did you go and take my fence for ballast, Corbet?” - -“No, I didn’t!” yelled Corbet. - -“You did, you scoundrel! Harris saw those young reprobates passing the -stones on board. Bring them back at once, every one of them, or I’ll -make you sup sorrow!” - -Here Mr. Long stepped forward. - -“It’s all right,” said he. “It’s no matter--” - -“What!” cried the owner of the fence. “I say it is _not_ all right; and -it _is_ matter. Bring me back my fence!” - -“I’ll bring it back.” - -“I’ll have the law of you!” - -“All right. We’ll replace it.” - -“Bring it back!” - -“All right.” - -“Bring--back--my--fence--!” - -Further and further away the schooner moved, and fainter and fainter -grew the voice that called after them, till at last but a low and -scarcely audible tone could be heard. - -As the vessel moved away, Bart stood at the mainmast. He had worked hard -the day before, running some lanyards through the truck, and now the -moment had come for his reward. Bruce Rawdon fired his pistol, and as -the report died away, up to the mast head went the black flag of the “B. -O. W. C.” - -And all the boys greeted it with a cheer. - - - - -IV. - -_Blomidon.--Tides and Fogs.--Songs and Seasickness.--The Five Islands, -and a Race up a Précipice._ - - -WINDING on through the tortuous channel of the creek, they reached its -mouth without accident, and passed out into the bay. The morning was -bright and beautiful, the wind blew fair, and all gave themselves up to -the joy of the occasion. The Antelope, it is true, was of ancient build -and model; she was short, and broad, and round, but the wind was of such -a kind as to bring out whatever capacity for sailing she might have. The -sun shone brightly, and all around them sparkled the blue waves of the -bay. Behind them was the long level of Grand Pré, beyond which the hills -arose, whose slopes were dotted with white houses. Before them was the -wide bay bounded by the Parrsboro’ shore, while conspicuous, as usual, -arose the grand form of Blomidon. - -“Is Blomidon a French name?” asked Bart of Mr. Simmons. - -“No. It is said to be a corruption of the words _Blow me down_, and it -is spelled that way on old maps. A good many old coasting skippers -pronounce it in that way. The winds that prevail out there off the cape -are a sufficient cause for such a name.” - -“Are there more winds off Blomidon than in other parts of the bay?” - -“O, yes. It is seldom calm there. It seems as if all the winds of the -Bay of Fundy and of the Basin of Minas struggled together there. It is a -sort of funnel through which they all pour backward or forward. Then the -sea out there is often quite heavy. The meeting of different currents -and different winds causes this. Seldom will you find a place where such -fierce currents rush to and fro.” - -“Shall we land at Blomidon first?” - -“I do not think we can with this wind. It will be better, I think, to -wait till we come back. We will go across the Basin to the Five Islands -first.” - -“Where are the highest tides of this Basin?” - -“Do you see away there,” said Mr. Simmons, pointing far away toward the -right, “where the land seems to sink down?” - -“Yes.” - -“Well, there the water runs up till it ends in the Shubenacadie River. -It is there that the tide runs highest, and I suppose there is no part -of the world where the rise is so great.” - -“Do you believe it rises ninety feet?” - -“I have heard so,--at spring tides,--but I rather think it is an -exaggeration. It is difficult to get a fair and accurate measurement. I -do not think that it rises much over seventy feet.” - -“That is high enough to surpass all other tides, I should think. But -see--hallo! what’s that?” - -“And Bart darted to the side of the vessel, attracted by a shout. A -large schooner was approaching, on board of which all were staring with -grinning faces at the Antelope. - -“Is that Captain Kidd’s craft?” shouted one of the sailors. - -“Yes,” screamed Bart. - -“We’re going to dig up a little buried treasure.” - -A yell of derision and laughter was the answer, to which the boys of the -Antelope responded by wild, unearthly shouts; and so the vessels passed -each other. - -In commemoration of this little incident, one of the boys commenced to -sing a doleful ditty, known in literature as “The Dying Confession of -Captain Kidd,” of which the following lines will give a good idea: - - “O, my name is Captain Kidd, - - As I sailed, as I sailed; - - O, my name is Captain Kidd, - - As I sailed. - - O, my name is Captain Kidd, - - And much wiekedness I did, - - And a heap of gold I hid, - - As I sailed.” - -One song started another, and one by one their favorite school songs -came out. One of these was the following: - - 1st Verse. (Brisk.) - - “Three blue-bottles, - - Three blue-bottles, - - Three blue-bottles sat - - On a milestone.” - - Recitative. - - “One flew away.” - - 2d Verse. (Slow.) - - “Two blue-bottles, - - Two blue-bottles, - - Two blue-bottles sat - - On a milestone.” - - Recitative. - - “Another flew away.” - - 3d Verse. (Slower.) - - “One blue-bottle, - - One blue-bottle, - - One blue-bottle sat - - On a milestone.” - - Recitative. - - “That one flew away.” - - 4th Verse. (Very slow, very sad, and very solemn.) - - “No blue-bottles, - - No blue-bottles, - - No blue-bottles sat - - On a milestone.” - - Recitative. - - “One came back.” - - 5th Verse. (Less sad.) - - “One blue-bottle, - - One blue-bottle, - - One blue-bottle sat - - On a milestone.” - -Gradually the blue-bottles of the song come back, till finally, on the -return of the three, the song comes to a triumphant conclusion. - -Standing at the helm, Captain Corbet gave directions from time to time -to the “mate” about sailing the vessel, and listened to the songs of -the boys with a patriarchal smile. He had already shown himself so -accessible, that all the boys had chatted with him; and at last they -insisted that he should sing. Captain Corbet did not need very much -solicitation; Standing at the helm with his eyes half closed, he began -in a thin, shrill, piping, nasal voice, full of queer tremolos and grace -notes, to drone out several melodies of a varied character. The first -one was an ancient ballad, called “The Farmier’s Boy,” which began as -follows: - - “O, the sky was black, the day was cold, - - And the winds did loud-ly roar, - - When cold and sad there corned a lad - - Into a farimier’s door. - - “‘Can you tell me,’ says he, ‘if any there be - - Who want to give emplo-o-o-o-o-o-y - - For to plough and to sow, and to reap and to mow, - - And to be a farmier’s bo-o-o-o-o-o-o-y-- - - To--be--a--farmier’s bo-o-o-o-o-o-o-y?’” - -Another song referred to the charms of domestic life, and was evidently -directed with a fell, satirical purpose against Messrs. Simmons and -Long, who were both hardened bachelors, and who, in Captain Corbet’s -estimation, had shown a degree of callousness and indifference to the -sweet attractions of domestic happiness which could not be too strongly -rebuked. - -Meantime the Antelope was drawing nearer to Blomidon, and while -listening to Captain Corbet’s dulcet strains, they were gazing -with admiration at the dark promontory. None noticed that they were -approaching a place where the water, agitated by the wind, and driven by -conflicting currents, was tossing itself up into foaming waves; but all -stood carelessly about, and the song and the laugh went on. Suddenly -the vessel seemed to give a jump, and then a plunge downward. At that -instant a wave came dashing over the bows, saturating to the skin a -little crowd that had gathered there. Then, with a rush, and a crack, -and a wild singing among the rigging, a squall struck the vessel. Over -she went on one side, while fresh waves dashed over her gunwale. In an -instant all was confusion. Every boy grasped some rope, and held on for -his life. The boys who had been drenched at the bows looked forlornly -at their companions. Then--poof! came another blast, and away, away went -five dark objects careering through the air to leeward. A cry from the -“B. O. W. C.” followed this last mishap. They had lost their hats, -their beautiful plumed felt hats, their pride, their joy--lost them -ingloriously and beyond all hope of recovery. With doleful faces they -looked at one another, wondering what they could do. There were no more -hats on board. They thought of handkerchiefs, and so one after another -bound his handkerchief around his head. But now there was not much -chance for lamentation over wet jackets or lost hats. A more dismal fate -was lowering over them. Each one knew it, saw it, felt it in his inmost -soul. For the sea was rough, and the little schooner pitched and tossed -every way, rolling, and leaping, and jumping, more than flesh and blood -could bear. At any rate, their flesh and blood could not bear it. A -feeling of wretchedness came to every heart; every face grew pale, -and assumed an expression of woe. Suddenly Messrs. Long and Simmons -disappeared into the cabin. This was the signal for others. Many -followed. A few, however, preferred the deck, with its fresh air, to -the close air and the sickening smell of bilge-water and potatoes, that -predominated below. But the scene had changed for them as for all, and -the grandeur of Blomidon, and the magnificence of an iron-bound coast, -were forgotten. Hushed was the merry laugh, silent the melodious song. -Gone were the joyous young faces that but a short time before had looked -out from the vessel upon the sea and sky. Faded were the bright eyes, -scattered the bright visions of enjoyment. Alas, how changed! - -And now, as they, went on farther, the wind grew fresher, and the waves -grew rougher, and the little schooner danced about like a mad thing; and -the booms creaked against the masts, and the sails flapped furiously, -and the blast went singing through the rigging. The wretched voyageurs -paid no attention to it. Their thoughts were all turned inward. Little -did they think now of that which they had recently been celebrating so -joyously: - - “A life on the ocean wave, - - A home on the rolling deep, - - “Where the scattered waters rave, - - And the winds--and the wi-i-i-i-inds--and the w-i-i-i-i-i-i-i-nds - - their re-e-e-e-e-vels keep!” - -Time passed, and still the Antelope went tossing, and rolling, and -pitching onward.. How long a time no one knew. Not one of the voyageurs -kept any account of that. Whether minutes or hours, they could not tell. -It seemed to them all one long duration, involving days or months. But -at last the motion of the vessel ceased, and she went on more smoothly. -Most of the boys below mustered up their courage, and began to think of -going on deck once more. Soon the joyous voice of Bart Darner summoned -them up. - -“Come along, boys. We’re going to anchor. We’re at Five Islands. -Hurrah!” - -“Hurrah! Hurrah!” - -A loud cry arose. Up went the boys scrambling to the deck, and there the -scene before them was sufficient to drive away all suffering. The water -was smooth, the wind was quieter. Before them lay the outlines of Five -Islands, rising beautifully out of the water between them and the main -land, the nearest one being not more than a mile away. These islands -were of different and peculiar shapes. The two more distant were rounded -and well wooded; the third, which was midway among the group, had lofty, -precipitous sides, and the summit was dome-shaped; the fourth was like -a table, rising, with perpendicular sides, to the height of two hundred -feet, with a flat, level surface above, which was all overgrown with -forest trees. The last, and nearest of the group, was by far the most -singular. It was a bare rock, which rose irregularly from the sea, -terminating at one end in a peak, which rose about two hundred feet -into the air. As they approached it, this rock had a very peculiar -appearance. It resembled, more than anything else, a vast cathedral -rising out of the sea, the chief mass of the rock corresponding with the -main part of the cathedral, while the tower and spire were there in all -their majesty. For this cause the rock has received the name of Pinnacle -Island. This lonely and desolate rock, that thus rose out before them, -grew more distinctly revealed as they drew nearer. At the base they saw -the white foam of breaking surf; while far on high, around its lofty, -tempest-beaten summit, they saw myriads of sea-gulls. Gathering in great -white clouds about this place, they sported and chased one another; they -screamed and uttered their shrill yells, which sounded afar over the -sea. - -Nearer and nearer they came, till at last they reached a smooth place on -the lee of the second island. This one was so close by Pinnacle Island, -that it seemed as though they might be joined at low water. Before them, -within a moderate distance, lay a gravelled beach, which extended as -far as they could see at the verge of the island, above which the dark -cliffs towered precipitously. - -“There!” said Mr. Simmons, pointing, with sparkling eyes, to the dark -and sombre rocks,--“there, boys, is the place for minerals! I have found -on those rocks the most beautiful specimens, that have ever been seen, -of crystals, of jasper, and of chalcedony. I have found onyx, spar, and -hundreds of other stones; all kinds of agates, fragments of copper ore, -barytes, beautiful petrifactions, and footprints of birds among masses -of sandstone. From those cliffs came the famous amethyst that was once -among the crown jewels of Louis XV. Come, boys, be diligent; use your -eyes, and you will find something worth remembering. David Digg, don’t -forget your hammers.” - -His enthusiastic speech was interrupted by a loud shout from Captain -Corbet. - -“Let go!” he cried. - -Down came the sails; and shortly after, rattle--rattle--rattle--rattle, -and with a plunge and a splash, the anchor rushed to the sea bottom. - -“And now for the boats,” said Mr. Long. - -The boat was brought up alongside. It was short, wide, and round, and -appeared to have been constructed after the identical tub which had -evidently served as a model for the Antelope. There was but one oar, -which was used to propel the boat by sculling. Not more than five or six -could get into her with safety. - -“We can’t all go ashore in that,” said Mr. Simmons. - -“Why not?” asked Captain Corbet. - -“Why, she won’t hold us.” - -“Yes, she will.” - -“O, no.” - -“Excuse _me_, sir,” persisted Captain Corbet. “Of course you don’t all -mean to go at once.” - -“O, I see,” said Mr. Simmons, whose mathematical mind began to grasp the -solution of the difficult problem. “You’ll make two or three trips with -her.” - -“Of course.” - -“O, that quite alters the case.” - -“Bless your heart, of course it does.” - -“Will we want any provisions?” asked Bart. - -“Provisions! What for?” - -“Are we going to camp out?” - -“O, no. We’ll return to the vessel. But provisions! O, yes, we’ll want a -lunch ashore, of course.” - -And now began the process of disembarkation. Messrs. Simmons and Long, -with two boys, went first. A number of baskets of provisions were thrown -in, and the mate sculled them ashore. - -On his return five more boys were ready. The “B. O. W. C.” generously -waited till the last. The loss of their hats had been a sore grievance, -but the handkerchiefs were not a bad substitute. Bart had his pistol -in his belt, and a sailor’s knife. Bruce Rawdon had a beautiful little -hatchet. The others had knives. When the boat returned, they were quite -worn out with impatience, and were almost ready to jump overboard and -swim ashore. But their time of waiting ended at last, and the boat -landed them on the gravelly beach.. - -It was about two o’clock when the party landed on the island. They had -started at ten, three hours before high tide. The tide was therefore -already beginning to turn, and would of course continue to run out till -seven or eight. On this account, the schooner could not come any nearer -for fear of being stranded. As they did not intend to pass the night on -the island, it was necessary, at all hazards, to keep the vessel afloat. -Captain Corbet had selected a place where he knew the vessel could ride -at all times of tide; and though it was inconveniently distant, yet it -was the only place for her under the circumstances. Mr. Simmons had -told Captain Corbet that he would leave the island in three hours, after -which the schooner was to sail to a port a few miles off on the main -land, and anchor for the night. He had also taken care to let all the -boys understand these arrangements perfectly, and had warned them not to -be too far away when the hour for leaving might come. - -As the last of the passengers landed, they walked about the beach, -looking up at the gigantic cliffs, picking up the stones and shells, and -exulting in the novelty of their situation. The island was about half a -mile long, and about half that width. The beach was narrow; and the boys -began to look, with longing eyes, to the summit of the island. In their -wanderings they came across their companions. Mr. Simmons, followed by -Bogud, was busy at the rocks in one place. Mr. Long, with Billymack, -was working away near him. The baskets lay open, and all could help -themselves to lunch. After satisfying their hunger, the “B. O. W. C.” - quickly determined to explore the island thoroughly, with the hope of -finding a way to the top. With this intention they started off, and at -length found a place which seemed to promise what they desired. It -was at the end nearest to Pinnacle Island. A torrent had made a rough -pathway for itself in that place, and though the stones were somewhat -insecure, yet it seemed safe enough for active lads. - -Up this place, then, they tried to climb. The footing was very insecure, -the loose stones constantly rolling down, and making it dangerous for -one to go behind another. It was so steep that they had to climb with -hands as well as feet. They clutched the roots of trees, the long, tough -grasses, and the thick ferns. Thus pulling, pushing, clutching, dodging -stones, and forcing a way up through all difficulties, they-managed to -scramble to the summit. - - - - -V. - -_Exploring a desert Island.--Tumbling over a Cliff.--Peril of Bruce.--A -mad Row over the waves.--Adrift in the Fog._ - - -ON reaching the summit, the triumphant, climbers gave vent to -their feelings in loud shouts. Looking out from their lofty perch, a -magnificent scene unfolded itself before their eyes. There was the broad -expanse of water. In the distance, a kind of haze rested over the -hills, which, to experienced eyes, would have been significant of -an approaching fog, but it gave no such warning to them. There rose -Blomidon, always the supreme monarch of the scene. Around them were -clustered the other islands; and here, directly opposite them, and -beneath them, was Pinnacle Island, with its cloud of screaming gulls. -Yet it was not to these, or to any one of these, that the eyes of the -boys were most attracted. There, beneath them, lay another object, which -had for them a greater charm. It was the Antelope. There she swung at -her anchor, while ever and anon the passing breeze, as it came by, swept -out the folds of the black flag, from which that benevolent face, -which it bore, seemed to look up at them with a grin of welcome, -encouragement, and sympathy. - -It was another proud moment for the “B. O. W. C.” - -After feasting their eyes on this fascinating flag, they all started -off to explore the island. There was not much to explore; but what -there was, proved difficult. The trees grew densely, interlacing their -branches, while beneath them was a thick growth of underbrush and ferns. -Fallen trunks, some fresh fallen, others half rotted, intercepted them -at every step; and they had to climb over them or crawl under. Progress -was extremely difficult, and a good half hour was occupied in going -from one end’ of the island to the other. Here they rested for a while, -looking from the edge of the cliff down the precipice-into the sea. Then -they began to return, keeping along the edge of the island, where -the trees and the underbrush were not so dense. Beneath they could see -Messrs. Simmons and Long diligently hammering away. Scattered along the -beach were the other boys. In the air, abreast of them, the sea-gulls -darted about with hoarse screams. One huge fellow flew straight toward -them, without seeing them, carrying a fish in his claws. The sight of -them so frightened him, that he dropped the fish, and flew off with a -harsh shriek. On picking up the fish, they found it yet possessed of -much vigor. Bruce took it and hurled it far out, and watched it to see -where it would fall. It struck its own native element, into which it -sank; and the boys generously hoped that it was able to resume its life, -which had been interrupted by so wonderful a transition into the world -of air. - -So they wandered along, finding their way here much easier, and from -time to time stopping to examine some object of interest, to dart into -the woods after something that attracted their attention, or to lean -over the cliff, and let stones fall, ‘and watch them as they fell -straight down, far, down, till they struck the beach below. - -By and by they became scattered. Phil Kennedy and Tom Crawford had gone -across the island. Arthur and Bart were walking on, and Bruce lingered -behind to try and find a gull’s nest, which seemed to be somewhere over -the edge of the cliff. He lay down, and bent far over, and at length saw -what he suspected. The gull that was on the nest flew away in affright, -as she saw the face peering at her, and Bruce determined to seize the -eggs. But how could he? The nest was out of his reach, he scrutinized -the place narrowly, and at last concluded that it could be done. About -three feet beneath him was a projecting rock. On this he could Stand; -and holding on to the root of a tree at the edge of the cliff with one -hand, he could extend his other hand far enough to touch the nest. All -this he saw, and at once began to make the attempt. The edge of -the cliff was rocky, and hung over a foot beyond the precipice; the -projecting rock below did not come out so far. About five feet back, a -tree grew, one of the roots of which had projected itself forward, and -crooked itself along the edge, and the earth having been blown away, it -was now exposed. This root Bruce grasped; and lowering himself over the -edge, he let himself down till his feet touched the shelf; then lowering -himself still more, he prepared to reach out his hand. - -But at that instant a thrill of horror shot through every nerve. The -shelf on which he was standing seemed slowly to sink beneath him. Well -for him was it at that moment that he had not lowered, himself farther, -and that there had not yet been time to extend his arm to the nest. The -thrill of horror transfixed him. He sprang up, and grasped the root with -both hands. The next instant the shelf crumbled away, and his feet hung -idly in the empty air. A wild shriek sounded out--a shriek of mortal -terror, that sent an icy chill to the heart of Bart and Arthur, and -brought them back in mad anxiety and fear. - -Far below, Mr. Simmons had been busily hammering at the cliffs. His -basket was filled with unusually fine specimens, and he had just turned -to send off Bogud with this basket to the landing-place. He was just in -the midst of some directions about a peculiar hammer which he wanted, -when suddenly an immense mass of rock came thundering down, and buried -itself in the gravel, not ten feet in front of him. Mr. Simmons started -back, and rushed far out from the treacherous precipice. Looking up with -a white face, he sought to see the place from which the rock had fallen. - -He looked up. A deeper, deadlier pallor came to his face; big drops -started from his forehead; a shriek escaped him. - -“O, God! Who is it?” he groaned. - -For there on the edge, grasping the tree-root with both hands, hung the -figure of a boy writhing as he sought to find some place for a foothold -against the rock. Two figures were bending over. - -By the red shirts which all wore, he knew that the one in danger must be -one of those five that had dressed themselves in this way. But which of -them it was, he could not tell. - -His shriek roused others. Mr. Long came hurrying there, and the other -boys, all looking up with eyes of horror and ashen lips. The moments of -that suspense were agony. - -There was nothing that they could do. Mr. Long alone tried to do -something. Starting off at full speed, he ran on, trying to find a -place to scale the cliff. Gradually a few others followed. But the rest -thought it was of no use, and awaited the end in voiceless horror. - -Meanwhile Bruce Rawdon had clung to the root, shrieking for help, and -trying to find some resting-place for his feet. In vain he tried. The -precipice retreated inward, and the shelf that had fallen left a deeper -hollow behind. Almost senseless with the horror of his situation, he was -conscious of nothing but the fact that friends were near; and for these -he shouted, clinging desperately to the root of the tree. Another boy -might have fallen; but Bruce’s muscles had been toughened by all kinds -of manly exercise, and he had in him the germ and the promise of mighty -strength and stature. - -The shriek that roused Arthur and Bart was followed by others, which led -them speedily to the place. - -With a groan Arthur flung himself down, and grasped his brother by the -wrist. Bart took a swift glance around.. A small tree was growing near -the edge. Twining his sinewy legs around this, he bent his body over the -precipice, and caught Bruce by the waistband. Then, clutching the tree -with his legs, he made a mighty effort to raise Bruce. The latter, in -the mean while, had seized Arthur, who was also trying to raise him. -But Arthur had not a fair chance to exert his full strength, and so they -prevailed but little against the dead weight which they were trying to -lift. - -“Arthur!” cried Bart. - -“Well.” - -“Can you catch hold of this tree where my legs are? Hold it with one -hand, and then you can pull better with your other. Can you do it?” - -“Yes. I’ve got hold.” - -“Now then.” - -With a tremendous effort, both boys pulled together. The slender tree -bent beneath their efforts. But the weight was raised! Yes! O, thank -God! higher--higher! There was Bruce’s head at the edge, and now his -shoulders. And now he himself, by a last; despairing, convulsive -effort, had flung himself forward, and was on the rock. They dragged him -forward. He was saved. - -Arthur burst into tears, and held Bruce in his arms. Bart rushed off -for water. Returning in a few minutes with his leathern cup,--which he -always carried,--full of cold water, he gave it to Bruce. The fainting -boy drank it, and then drew a long breath. - -“God bless you, boys!” he said at last, wringing the hand of each. He -would have said more, but he could not. - -“I’ll be all right’ presently,” said he, taking a long breath. “My -heart feels painful;” and he pressed his hand against his breast. “Don’t -bother any more, Bart. I’m coming round fast. Just let’s sit here, and -be quiet for a little while.” - -They sat there in silence for some time; and gradually the color began -to come back to Bruce’s face. - -Suddenly the crackling of brushwood was heard, avid Mr. Long came -running up to them, his face as pale as death, and his eyes round with -the horror of a frightful suspense. The moment he saw the little group, -he flung himself on his knees by Bruce, and, catching him in his arms, -he kissed him again and again. - -“Thank God! O, thank God!” he moaned, and burst into tears. - -Hitherto Mr. Long had the reputation, among the boys, of being a hard, -unfeeling man; but from that moment this opinion was changed. - -Mr. Long said nothing more at that time, partly because he did not wish -to distress. Bruce by any questions just then, and partly because he -was so faint, from the tremendous rush up the cliff, that he could not -speak. In fact, for a time he seemed as much broken as Bruce. So they -sat quietly together waiting. - -Mr. Long’s effort was a desperate one, but the only thing to be done. It -is possible that Bart and Arthur, if they could not have drawn up Bruce, -might have held him there for a long time, and in that case Mr. Long -would have been there to save him. - -After about an hour, Bruce said he was all right, and they walked toward -the place of descent. It seemed, indeed, as though he had got over his -accident. He said his arms ached a little, and there was a slight pain -in his breast, but that it was passing away. The descent was toilsome, -but Bruce accomplished it as well as any of them. By the time he reached -the shore, he declared himself perfectly well. - -Mr. Simmons was there to meet him. He wrung his hand very earnestly, -with tearful eyes, but did not trust himself to speak. Then Bruce told -all about it, and the excitement of this adventure put an end to all -further search for minerals. - -At length five o’clock came, and they prepared to go back to the -schooner. The tide had fallen considerably, and a strong current was -running past them. The water was not so placid as it had been, but was -getting broken up, and somewhat rough. The wind had changed, and was -blowing more freshly than before. There were also gathering fog banks, -which were drawing nearer every moment, and threatening soon to be -around them. All things showed, therefore, that it was high time to -retire. Signals were made, and before, long they saw the boat leave the -schooner, and come to the shore. - -On landing, the mate wanted to know if any of them could scull a boat. -Bruce said that he could, and so did Arthur and Bart. The mate said that -he wanted to stay aboard to get the sails ready; and to save time, it -would be necessary for some one of them to bring the last boat aboard. -Each one of these three offered to scull her; but it was at last decided -that Arthur should go in the second boat and bring her back, while Bruce -should take the last load. Bart readily gave up his claim to the others; -and so it was arranged. - -“But are you sure you’re strong enough for that?” said Mr. Long. - -“Strong? Of course.” said Bruce. “I’m stronger than ever, sir.” - -So the first boat started with the same load which it had when landing -before, with the addition of one boy more. The next boat took Arthur and -four more boys, leaving Bruce, and Tom, and Phil, and Bart. - -About an hour had passed between the time when the boat left to take -them from the island and the time when Arthur brought it back for the -last trip. In that hour many changes had taken place. The tide had -fallen farther. Between the beach, where they stood, and Pinnacle -Island, the rocks were laid bare, and could be traversed on foot. -Between the schooner and the shore, a swift current was running, -which grew stronger every moment. By six o’clock the current was very -powerful. The mate, on his second trip, had considerable difficulty in -getting to the schooner; and he had given very careful directions to -Arthur as to the course which he should go in returning. - -“You must head the boat farther up,” said he, “so as to strike the -scho’oner fair. I didn’t cal’late right about that there tide. You’ve -got to head your boat well off that side, and then the tide ‘ll help you -instead of henderin’.” - -“All right,” said Arthur. - -In going ashore, he found the current very strong; but the beach -was long, and, of course, it was very easy to land somewhere. As it -happened, he was carried down some fifty feet below the place which -he wished to reach; but that didn’t make any practical difference. It -served to open his eyes to the peculiar danger before them, and made him -see that the very greatest care would have to be exercised in returning, -or else the swift tide would sweep them away from the place to which -they wished to go. - -As Arthur looked round, after the other boys had got in, an exclamation -burst from him. - -“Whew!” - -“What’s the matter?” - -“Why, the fog. How suddenly it has come up! Why, it’s getting as thick -as night. Look here, Bruce; we’ve got to be pretty careful this time. -See here; you must head out that way, for the current is running like a -race-horse, and this fog isn’t helping matters.” - -He then proceeded to explain to Bruce the best course to take, and Bruce -said he would do exactly as he told him. - -“You’re sure you can do it. You’re sure you’re not used up at all,” said -Arthur. - -“Not a bit of it!” said Bruce, with a laugh. - -“If I feel used up, I’ll hand over the oar to you or Bart.” - -Saying this, he worked away with vigorous pushes, and the boat moved in -the direction indicated by Arthur. - -Bruce soon found that Arthur had not exaggerated the force of the -current. It seemed to drag the boat sidewise with fearful power. But a -strong hand was at the scull, and the boat’s course was true, and every -moment brought them nearer. - -As they went, the fog grew thicker at every foot. The wind blew more -strongly, and the water grew rougher, making the progress of the clumsy -boat more difficult. Soon the shore grew indistinct; but this they did -not regard, since their eyes were fixed on the schooner, to which they -drew steadily nearer. There, on board, stood the-other boys; and Mr. -Simmons was talking to Captain Corbet, and Mr. Long was watching them -with some anxiety. The mate stood near the bow with a rope, ready to -throw as soon as they should come within reach. - -But though near enough to see all this, they could not hope to get there -yet without a severe effort. For now the farther out they went, the -stronger grew the current; and Bruce felt a heavier drag, against the -boat, and gathered up his strength for sterner exertions. He took a -hasty look at the schooner, so as to get her bearings, and then headed -the boat at a sharper angle against the current. This was admirably -calculated; and now the boat fell off less, and seemed to work itself -steadily toward the schooner. - -Arthur was in the bows, anxiously watching the boat’s course. The other -boys sat in silence, conscious of the hazard before them, but facing it -bravely. On board the schooner not a word was spoken. Mr. Long’s face -seemed to grow more anxious. His hands clutched one another with a rigid -grasp, and his eyes seemed fastened on Bruce. The mate stood with his -rope, not venturing to make any suggestion, for he saw that Bruce was -doing all that could be done. His forehead was contracted into a painful -frown, and he was whistling softly to himself (from a habit that he had -acquired), and which, in him, was a sign of grave perplexity of soul. - -Nearer and nearer came the boat; but the anxious watchers began to -see that, the current was swerving them off more rapidly than they had -expected, and that the angle of the boat’s drift would lie not so near -as they hoped. Bruce saw this, and summoned up a new force out of his -strong muscles. A few mighty ‘strokes, and something was gained even -against the pressure of that tremendous current. There was the schooner. -On--on; nearer--nearer. - -They had hoped to touch her bow; but now they saw it would be well if -they could get near her stern. Back ran the mate with his rope. Not a -word was spoken. No one ventured to call for greater exertions from -that brave, strong boy, who was plying his oar so mightily. And now the -moment had come. Forward sprang the mate, and the rope sped through the -air. Arthur’s hands were extended to seize it. Bruce did not abate one -stroke, but worked with desperate energy. The boat was borne past the -schooner’s quarter. The rope touched Arthur’s right hand,--his fingers -closed around it. - -Alas! it was but the extreme end of the rope that he held; and before -his other hand could seize it, it had slipped through his fingers, and -fell into the water. - -“Row, row, Bruce! I’ve dropped the rope!” - -A groan burst from Bruce. He gave three tremendous strokes. They were -the last efforts of despairing energy. As he moved his arms to make the -fourth, he staggered back. The oar fell from his nerveless grasp. He -sank down, with a groan, at the bottom of the boat. - -“Boys, I--I’m dying!” - -Gasping out these words, Bruce closed his eyes, and lay motionless. - -A cry of dismay and terror burst from the schooner. Pallid faces, and -eyes of horror, were turned toward the boat, which now, hurled on by -the swift current, was borne farther and farther away, until at last it -vanished from view in the fog. - - - - -VI. - -_Up Anchor and after them.--Blast of the Foghorn.--A long Search amid -Mists, and Darkness, and Storms._ - - -AS the boat drifted away from the schooner, horror for a time seemed -to have struck dumbness into all on board. From this stupor Mr. Long was -the first to rouse himself. - -“Captain,” he cried, “we must up sail and after them.” - -“Which way shall wo go?” - -“After them any way. Follow the poor lads before they get any farther. -Come, boys, up with the anchor! Corbet, up with your sails!” - -The way that anchor was walked up was a wonder. In an incredibly short -space of time the schooner was dashing through the water, swept on by -wind and tide. - -“Which way does this current take us?” asked Mr. Long. - -“Well, right round the island, and down to Biomidon, and then out into -the Bay of Fundy.” - -“I can’t see the island.” - -“No; the fog’s too thick; but it’s right off there,” said Captain -Corbet, waving his left hand. - -“I suppose the poor lads couldn’t work ashore.” - -“Not with, their bare hands. Their oar’s gone--that’s the mischief of -it.” - -Mr. Long looked gloomily around. - -“The only thing, then, is for us to follow on where they may be -drifting.” - -“You’ve hit the nail on the head, sir. There’s nothin’ else for us--not -a hooter.” - -“How far is the main land from here?” - -“Several miles.” - -“Does the current strike near it anywhere?” - -“No, _sir!_ It goes straight in a bee line for Blomidon.” - -“After leaving this island, then, Blomidon is the nearest land for -them.” - -“Yes, or Parrsboro’.” - -“How long will it take them to drift there?” - -“About three hours.” - -“How far will they be likely to drift?” - -“Let me see. It’s seven o’clock now. It’s nearly dead low tide’. It’ll -be on the flood soon, and by the time them there lads get to Blomidon, -there’ll be a flood tide.” - -“And how will that be for them?” - -“It’ll drift ’em back.” - -“In which direction?” - -“Wal, sir, it would take a man with a head as long as a hoss, tail and -all, to answer that there pint. Lor’ bless you, in this here bay there’s -no knowin’ where the tide ‘ll drift a man.” - -“If it weren’t for the fog, there’d be no danger,” said Mr. Long, -musingly. - -“That there’s an ondeniable fact, at any rate.” - -“Do you think the fog will continue?” - -Captain Corbet screwed his head round in the direction of the wind, and -drew up his face into a most extraordinary grimace. - -“Well, I rayther think,” said he, slowly, “that you’ve got me there.” - -“You don’t know, then, anything about it,” said Mr. Long, impatiently. - -“Not a hooter.” - -Mr. Long walked away, and looked mournfully out over the dim sea. - -Deep sadness and sore anxiety now reigned over the little vessel. Mr. -Simmons said not a word, but sat staring fixedly at the fog. The boys -stood in silent groups. Not a word was spoken. - -Mr. Long walked forward to the bows, and looked out. The wind was -increasing, and the sea was growing rougher. Evening was passing away, -night would come--and then, what! To think of those poor lads in the -boat was anguish. He walked back again to Captain Corbet. - -“Where are we now?” - -“Wal, we’re just roundin’ the island.” - -“I can’t see it.” - -“No, I have to give her a wide berth. It’s low tide, and the ledges are -dangerous.” - -“Do you think the boat may be drifting out here, or nearer in shore?” - -“Wal, accordin’ to my cal’lation, they’d oughter be out here somewhere. -Jedgin’ by the direction the boat took, I should say I was followin’ -pooty close in their track, though there’s no knowin’ for sartin.” - -“Oughtn’t we to be up to them by this time?” - -“Wal, I don’t know. You saw the pace they went off at. Geeracious! Talk -of race-hosses! Why, that boat went off at a rate to beat all creation -holler!” - -“But we’re going faster. We have the same current, and we’ve got sails -up.” - -“Never a truer word; but then it took some time for us to get a start, -and in that time, gracious ony knows where they’ve got to. The ony thing -that we’ve got to do, as I can see, is to keep follerin’ our noses right -straight on, and keep in the current.” - -Suddenly a thought struck Mr. Long. Rushing down into the cabin, he -returned with a fog-horn, and raising it to his lips, blew a long, -piercing blast. - -“That’ll fetch ’em, if anything does,” said Captain Corbet. - -“Silence!” cried Mr. Long, listening intently, while all others on board -stood listening for the return cry. - -But no sound came back. - -“They’ve got a pistol, and if they hear us, they would fire. Have you a -gun, captain?” - -“Nary gun.” - -“This horn, then, is the best thing. Shouting is of no use,” said Mr. -Long; and he blew another blast. - -Again they listened, and again there was no response. To their waiting -ears, as they listened in an anguish of expectation, there came no -answering cry, no shout, no pistol shot--nothing but the plash of waves -near by, the singing of the wind through the rigging, and the boom of -the surf on some distant beach which the fog hid from view. - -On went the schooner, and Mr. Long blew unweariedly, clinging to this -horn as something by which he still might gain access to the lost boys, -and finding in this occupation something of that antidote to pain which -action of any kind yields to the energetic nature. But time passed -on, and only the winds heard these shrill blasts, and only the winds -responded to the signal. - -So darkness came upon them, and night; and the darkness of this night -was intensified, by the thick fog, so that it became a darkness which -might be felt. - -“Ef we want to save the boys,” said Captain Corbet at last to Mr. Long, -who stood dejectedly near him, “my opinion is, that we’d better keep -afloat ourselves; but at the rate we’re goin’, it’s my opinion that -before long we’ll be high and dry. And we may thank our blessed stars if -we light on a mud flat, and don’t get dashed to small bits on Blomidon. -Them’s my sentiments.” - -“Why, don’t you know where you are?” - -“No more idee where I am than the man in the moon.” - -“I thought you knew the coast.” - -“So I do--like a book.” - -“What do you mean, then?” - -“Why, if it was only the fog, I wouldn’t mind; but, mind you, there’s -the tides. The flood tide ’ll be coming along soon, and then where’ll -we go to? We may get twisted up into an eddy, and find ourselves on -Cape Split; or we may glide up to Windsor, or get thrown on the rocks, -goodness ony knows where. There’s no knowin’ where these tides may take -it into their blessed hearts to drift us to. So the long and the short -of it is, I move we anchor.” - -“But isn’t it a common thing for schooners to drift about here?” - -“Not in the Basin of Minas, thank you. No, sir. Not if they can help it. -Out in Fundy it’s different. Fundy hain’t got no bottom to anchor on, -except near the shores. Fundy ain’t one universal mud bank, nuther. -Out in Fundy every skipper cal’lates on driftin’, jest as a sea captain -cal’lates on navigatin’ by scientific observation. Driftin’ in Fundy is -a science by itself, and vessels make v’y’ges back’ard and for’ard by a -new patent driftin’ process. But in here nobody drifts. It’s no go.” - -Mr. Long gave a heavy sigh. - -“At any rate, let’s drift a little longer. I cling to hope of coming up -with the boys.” - -“Comin’ _up_ with them! Law bless my heart alive, we’ve comed up with -’em and passed ’em long ago. We’ve got on different tracks somehow. -Ef they’d been afloat, they’d never missed hearin’ that everlastin’ -trumpet you’ve been a-blowin’ on so like all possessed.” - -Now all this time since they had left the anchorage the wind had been -blowing strongly. As the darkness increased, Captain Corbet had taken -in his foresail. The water grew rougher, the little schooner labored -heavily, and pitched, and tossed, and rolled about, while the waves -dashed over her bow. Mr. Simmons had retired to his berth with the -bodily pangs of seasickness superadded to his mental anxiety. One by one -the boys had disappeared below, and for an hour or more none were left -on deck but Mr. Long, Captain Corbet, and the mate. A light had been -hoisted, and Mr. Long still blew the fog-trumpet. - -But he no longer blew it with any hope. Captain Corbet had presented -full before him a palpable fact, and that was, that they must be far -away from any place where the boat could possibly be. They had sailed -on and passed beyond them. They could not have been near the beat at any -time. Some other current must have carried it away in another direction. -Had it not been so, they must assuredly have heard those shrill yells, -and in that ease they would have responded. Either they had been caught -in another current, or else that had happened to them on which he dared -not think. But then, even so, if they had got into another current, -could it avail them? For that boat to drift out into this sea would be -sure destruction. - -“Captain,” said he, “are there more currents than one about those -islands?” - -“As many currents as there is hairs on a hoss’s tail.” - -“Then it’s quite likely they got into another one.” - -“It’s sartin.” - -“Can you conjecture how they may have gone?” - -“Wal, you see the current we came by was a kind of inside one that took -us round the nighest island. Now, outside of that there was another -current that kind V goes round the next island, which is a bigger one -than the one we were at. I’ve been turnin’ it over in my head, and I -cal’late that that there boat, jedgin’ by the course she took as she -shot by us, got swept into the outer current, and was driven away around -the outer island.” - -“We couldn’t have been near her at all, then.” - -“It seems not.” - -“Where could they have been when we began to blow?” - -“As near as I can cal’late, jedgin’ by the natur’ of the currents, and -the course they took, they might have been off the farthest end of the -other island.” - -“How far away from the place where we were?” - -“Over two miles--yes, more’n three miles.” - -“How far can you hear one of these fog-horns?” - -“About a mile.” - -“So they couldn’t have heard us?” - -“Couldn’t have heard a note. No, sir. And that accounts for their -silence.” - -“Where does the current go to, after going round that island you speak -of?” - -“Wal, there’s a good many, but there’s two main currents: one goes round -the island, and returns and jines the one that we come down by.” - -“And if the boat came by that, it would be behind us.” - -“Jes so.” - -“About how far?” - -“O, ten miles or more by this time.” - -“If so, every moment now takes us farther from them.” - -“That’s about it, anyway you take it. But the flood tide’s catching us -now, and where it’s takin’ us to’s more’n I know.” - -“It will take the boat too.” - -“Yes; of course.” - -“You spoke of another current.” - -“Yes, the other current sweeps around farther up, nigh unto the main -land, and takes a turn and comes down, till it jines the gen’ral current -along with the others.” - -“So, if they had drifted into that, they would still be behind us.” - -“Of course.” - -“Where do you think we are now?” - -“Can’t tell. Somewhere near Blomidon, though perhaps I’m jest as near -Horton Bluff.” - -“How far would the boat drift till the tide turns?” - -“Wal, they would have time to drift nearly to Blomidon.” - -“And when the tide turns, you can’t tell where they’d go?” - -“No, _sir_--nor nobody else.” - -“What chance would there be of the boat keeping afloat?” - -Captain Corbet shook his head. - -“It’s rough--precious rough. Ef it had been any other boys than them -there partic’ler boys, I’d have my doubts. They’d all be swamped, sure -as a gun. But them there boys is oncommon lively creeturs. An’ they’ve -got a great idea of a rowboat, though they don’t know nothin’ of -sailin’. They’d manage to keep afloat as long as anybody I know of. -They’d make a precious hard fight of it afore they’d knock under, mind, -I tell you. They’re boys that are up to snuff. They mind me of my babby. -My babby is the cutest little creetur that ever I see in all my born -days. Why, that there infant last week--jest a week ago to-morrow--that -there infant--hallo--O--ah--hur--why, I declare--Mr. Long--why, he’s -gone, ah’ hasn’t heard about the infant.” - -It was a fact. Mr. Long had gone, and had lost the story of the infant. -A moment afterward the shrill blast of the horn sounded out over the -deep. - -“Captain,” said he, as he came back again, “I won’t object any more to -your anchoring. Do as you choose. God alone knows what is best to do. He -alone can save those dear boys. I must try to trust them to him.” - -A few moments after, the vessel was swinging at her anchor in twenty -fathoms water. - -Captain Corbet and the mate calmly retired to sleep, leaving the -schooner to take care of herself. But there was one who slept not all -through that night. Mr. Long could not leave the deck. The air below -was stifling to one so full of anxiety and suspense as he was. All -night long he paced the deck with unwearied footsteps,--all night -long,--stopping at times to sound his trumpet; stopping again to peer -through the thick darkness that hung around like a funeral pall over the -grave of the departed. There, too, over and over again in the darkness -and the gloom of that night, he knelt down on that deck, and poured -forth all the anguish of his soul, calling forth out of his despair unto -Him who alone is able to save. After each prayer his soul would grow -calmer, and the storm of his agitated heart would cease for a time, -till, gradually reassuming its strength, his grief would once more -return, to be once more dispelled by prayer. So, amid vigil, and -fasting, and prayer, and grief, passed, the night away; and when the -dawn came, there stood this man looking out over the sea, with a face -pale from suffering, and eyes dimmed with unfamiliar tears. - -The dawn of day brought at least one comfort. The wind had changed -during the night, and the fog had gone. The wide sea once more unfolded -itself, and as the light grew stronger, Mr. Long eagerly scanned it in -all directions in search after the lost ones. At last, rousing Captain -Corbet and the mate, he urged them to set sail once more. - -Captain Corbet came on deck, and looked round in great curiosity to -see where he was. He had gone to sleep in beautiful ignorance of his -whereabouts, and it had been an interesting problem as he dozed off to -sleep. - -The moment he looked around, he uttered a cry. - -“Good gracious!” - -Mr. Long looked inquiringly at him. - -“Ef I ain’t back at my own door! Don’t you see it, Mr. Long? Why, darn -me, ef we haven’t drifted clean back to Grand Pré!” - -Mr. Long looked in wonder to where Captain Corbet pointed, and there, -to his surprise, he recognized the familiar shore. A cloud came over his -brow. The thought of the lost ones came to him more vividly as he saw -the place which might possibly be doomed to know them no more forever. - -“Ef it warn’t-dead low tide,” said Captain Corbet, “darn it ef I -wouldn’t have a good mind to tie up the old Anty to the nighest stump, -and take a run up to see the babby.” - -Mr. Long turned upon him with so terrible a frown that Captain Corbet -was awed. - -“O--I didn’t mean it. I--I ony made the remark. Of course I didn’t mean -it--it’s ony a leetil outbust of parential affection.” - -“Come, make haste!” said Mr. Long, sternly. “There’s no time to lose. We -must scour the bay till we find the boys.” - -The anchor went up, and up went the sails, and the Antelope once more -spread her wings to the blast, and went over the waters. - -But where could they go? - -That was the question which it was difficult to answer. Where, or in -what direction, east, west, north, or south? - -Through all that day they sailed about. First, they went down the -straits past Blomidon; then, turning back, they stretched away far over -to the farthest extremity of the bay. They spoke what vessels they met. -They watched every floating object, and it was with a feeling of relief -that each one resolved itself into a chip, or a shingle, or a log, and -never into a hat or the seat of a boat. - -So passed the day. - -Searching in such a way, without any clew, it was difficult for them -to feel that they were doing anything. While they were searching in -the east, the traces of the object, of their search might all be in -the west; and while they were examining the north, the boat might be -drifting in the south; or, while they were in the Basin of Minas, the -boat might be helplessly carried about by the currents of the Bay of -Fundy. - -One thing there was to comfort them; and that was, the departure of -the fogjdhe clear atmosphere, the pleasant breeze, the bright sunshine. -Several vessels had been met with, and all had promised to keep a -lookout and engage other vessels in the same service. On such a sea, -and under such a sky, there could be no danger, if the boat had survived -the night. - -But _had_ the boat survived the night? - -Alas! and alas! who could answer that! - -Mr. Long, at any rate, would not give up. As though in defiance of fate, -he would not haul down that flag which Bart had hoisted, but kept it -flying, in the fond hope that it would once more greet their eyes. - - - - -VII. - -_Lost in the Fog.--At the Mercy of the Tide.--The last Rock.--Wanderings -on a lonely Shore.--A great Discovery.--A new Mode of Cooking._ - - -MEANTIME, what had become of the boys? Was the “B. O. W. C.” thus -overwhelmed beneath the dark wave? Were all the grief, and the watching, -and the tireless search of the noble-hearted Mr. Long to be unavailing? - -We shall see. - -As the boat sped away, dragged on by the swift current, the boys sat -in astonishment and consternation. Bart supported Bruce’s head, -and Arthur hurried to the stern to assist. They wet his pale brow in -silence; while Bruce, in a faint voice, told them that he had been -seized with a sudden spasm. He soon felt better, though unable to exert -himself. - -By that time the fog had closed in around them, and both the schooner -and the shore had been shut out from their view. They were drifting -swiftly on, they could not tell where. For a long time they sat watching -and waiting--how long they did not know. In seasons of suspense, moments -are prolonged to hours; and so it was here. On they went, and still on. -Each one well knew all the possibilities of the danger that lay before -them. There was a wide and a wild sea, overspread with fog-clouds, where -the waves were rising and the night was coming down. Into the midst of -all this they were being borne by swift currents. This they all knew, -yet not a sound of dismay escaped any one of them. Whatever each one may -have felt of fear, he sat in silence and gave no sign. There were -stout hearts that beat in those slender, boyish breasts, that awaited, -undismayed, the terrors of the deep. - -Bart was the first to rouse himself. - -“Boys,” said he, drawing forth a tin pail from under the seat, “we must -fight for our lives, and make up our minds to pass the night here. Well -have to use this concern, I think.” - -“Here’s something, too, that may be of use,” said Arthur, drawing out -a narrow plank from the bottom of the boat. “Phil, there’s another one; -just draw it out.” - -Phil reached down for it, but Tom Crawford dragged it out first. - -“I’m stronger than you, Phil,” said he. “If there’s to be any paddling, -I’ll do it.” - -Meanwhile Arthur drew his knife, and began cutting at the plank so as to -fashion it into an oar. Tom did the same. - -Soon they were interrupted by a shout from Bart. - -“Hurrah, boys! Land! land!” he cried. “Look! look!” and he pointed to the -left. - -True enough, there was the dim outline of black cliffs rising high not -far away. Past these they were drifting. In an instant Arthur and Tom -put out their planks, and began to use them as paddles, in the Indian -fashion, heading the boat toward the shore, and putting forth all their -strength. Bart, too, tried to use his dipper for a paddle. - -The boat drifted on; but the current swept them in nearer and nearer. -Some progress was also made by the paddles, rude though they were. - -Borne on by the tide, the boat every moment drew nearer to the shore; -yet every moment it was swiftly drifting by, and it now became a -question whether it would be at all possible for them to reach, the -land. Already they could see the end of the island, a precipitous cliff, -not far away, toward which they were drifting. A few minutes more, and -they would be there. - -The cliff was high. At its base there was a ledge of rocks, which ran -down into the water. At this low tide the ledge extended for a long -distance, and terminated in a projecting mass, which was covered with an -immense growth of sea-weed.. Around this point the current passed, and -it was to this that the boat was speeding. - -And now all their exertions were put forth to extricate the boat from -the central grasp of the current. Already, thanks to their former -exertions, they had forced it from the centre to the edge of the tide, -and a few more vigorous efforts might bring them to the shore. - -But so swift was the tide, that it seemed about to snatch them away from -that shore when it was just within reach. It seemed as though they could -almost have waded ashore if they had jumped overboard. But that, of -course, could not be done, for the power of the current would have swept -any one away who should try it. - -To every stroke of the rude paddles the tide brought a counteracting -influence; and for every six inches of forward motion, there were two -feet of sidelong drift. The boat’s head was toward the shore, but -her motion was broadside; and so the shore seemed ever near, yet -inaccessible, and most unattainable when most within reach. - -And so on past the whole length of the island, until the cliff at the -farthest extremity was reached and passed. They were but ten feet from -the shore. The rocky ledge, covered with sea-weed, still extended before -them. It was to this that they now tried to force the boat. - -Ten feet! Only ten feet! And the ten feet lessened to nine, and the nine -to eight, and the eight to seven, and the seven to six. - -But six feet between them and the shore! - -But six feet! Would they--could they--fail at last? - -Six feet only! But the tide was wild and strong, and now, at this last -crisis of their fate, seemed like some living monster, fearful that -his prey was escaping from his power. It was as though his grasp -was fastened on them with a fiercer clutch and a more desperate -tenacity,--as though, at this supreme hour, he had risen in his might, -and, even at the very gate of his domain, had seized them, and was -trying to draw them to destruction. - -But six feet! Yet between them and the rock of their hope, even in those -few feet of watery distance, what risks and dangers lay--what chances of -loss--what baffled hopes--what despair! - -The suspense was anguish. - -On they went with the fury of the torrent. “O, why haven’t I a paddle!” - groaned little Phil Kennedy. Bruce raised himself, and looked around, -with his pale face and staring eyes. Arthur, and Tom, and Bart put forth -their last energies. - -Four feet! - -Not a word was spoken. The tightly compressed lips, the resolute eyes, -the frowning brows of the struggling boys, spoke of their resolution; -their panting, heaving breasts told how heavily they labored with their -clumsy, unwieldy oars. - -A roar sounded in their ears to the right. It was the rush of the -current as it swept past the extreme verge of the ledge. There was the -open sea. There lay their last chance; beyond it--destruction. - -They knew it--they felt it. That sound struck on their ears like the -knell-of doom. One last effort--one superhuman struggle. Nearer came the -boat; although even then trembling on the extreme verge, yielding to the -current, it turned slightly, bringing its head closer to the rock. - -It was done. - -In an instant, arms were outstretched, and Bart’s hands were clinging to -the sea-weed. For a moment the boat was checked. - -Tom Crawford and Phil Kennedy grasped the sea-weed also; and at that -instant, Arthur, seizing the boat’s rope, sprang ashore. His leap jerked -the boat, which, caught by the tide, was swept off, leaving masses of -sea-weed, torn from the rocks, in the hands of the boys. - -A cry of despair arose. - -But Arthur held the rope wound about his hands. As the boat moved, he -steadied his feet for the struggle. The swift tide bore it off. As the -rope tightened out, the fury of the current, driving against the boat, -contended with the strength of that one boy. For a moment it was the -boy who lost. At the first jerk, his feet slipped on the treacherous -sea-weed. He fell. He was dragged toward the water. - -No sound escaped from those in the boat,--not a word either of fear for -themselves or of encouragement or warning to Arthur. Well they knew that -Arthur would die on the rocks, or be drowned in the sea, rather than -lose his hold of that rope, which, in his desperate purpose, he had -twisted round his hands. - -For a few moments Arthur could not recover himself. On that slippery -sea-weed there was no foothold. He was drawn nearer and nearer to the -water. He looked around hastily. At last he saw the round top of a -boulder a little on one side. To this he managed to work himself, -letting the boat yield to the tide still more as he did so. A few steps, -and he was there. He plunged into the water, he pressed his feet against -that stone, and then, drawing himself back, he pulled with all his -strength. - -The boat yielded. The power was now in his hands. Grasping the rope -nearer, he drew the boat in more closely, and at last it touched -the-shore. - -They were saved at last! - -Out leaped Bart into the water, and, holding the boat, he added his -strength to that of Arthur. The others followed as quickly as possible. -Bruce had begun to regain his strength once more, and was able to get -out without help. The unparalleled exertions which he had undergone on -the cliff had given a severe strain, which, in his final struggle to -reach the schooner, had resulted in a spasm of his heart. From this he -was now rallying once more. Joy at reaching the land did much to restore -him, and he was soon able to start wherever the others wished to go. - -Their first movement was to go away from the ledge farther up to the -beach. The rocks were flat, and not very difficult to walk over. -They towed the boat as they went, which was a difficult task, but -successfully accomplished. After severe exertions, they at length -brought the boat about a quarter of a mile up to a place where there was -an indentation in the line of shore, and scarcely any current. Here they -hauled it up some distance, and fastened it securely. After this they -went up to the gravelly beach at the foot of the cliff, and sat down to -rest for a while, and to consider the situation. - -The fog was as thick as ever, and they could see but a little distance -along the beach, or out on the water. The side of the island on which -they found themselves was sheltered from the chill wind. As to the boat, -it was impossible to draw it up any farther. It would be necessary to -wait until the tide rose higher, before they could bring it into a place -of safety. But little could be done, except watch it from time to time. - -It was now late, and darkness was coming on rapidly. Soon they would’ be -surrounded by the impenetrable shades of night. Bart and Arthur offered -to go along the shore and find some place where they could pass the -night, leaving the others to watch the boat, and see if there were any -signs of the schooner. - -But then the important question arose, what should they do for their -suppers? For a time this puzzled all of them. - -“I’ll tell you what it is, boys,” said Bart at last; “I think I know how -to get something; We passed a place down on the shore where there were -lots of mussels. Tom, you come along with me, and Phil can go with -Arthur. Bruce may watch here.” - -This plan was eagerly adopted; and as there was no time to lose, the -boys set out. Fortunately, the place spoken of by Bart was not far -away, and fortunately, too, the rocks were covered with shell-fish of -different kinds, and the hollows of the rocks filled with them. Tom and -Bart heaped them into their handkerchiefs. - -“Hallo!” cried Bart, suddenly, in a joyous tone. “See here, Tom.” - -“What?” - -“Come here.” - -Tom went, and found Bart plunging his hands most vigorously into a pool -of water, which the retreating tide had left in a rocky hollow. - -“What have you got there?” - -“I call them shrimps,” said Bart, holding one up in his hands. “They’re -rather small, though. Go about and hunt up another hole.” - -Tom went off, and in a short time called to Bart in a loud voice. - -Bart started up. - -Tom was walking toward him with a large, dark object in his hand. - -“A lobster!” cried Bart. “A lobster! Hurrah! and hurrah again! Tom, -you’ve saved us all from starvation. Good on your head. We needn’t wait -here any longer, for it’s getting dark, and we’ll have to join the other -fellows.” - -On returning to Bruce, they displayed their treasures, to the great -delight of all. Arthur and Phil had also been successful. Walking -farther up the beach, they had come to the end of the cliff, and reached -a steep, well-wooded bank. It was not far away, and there were fir -trees, from which they could easily cut enough brush to make very -comfortable beds. There was also plenty of drift-wood, with which they -could make a fire. - -Without any more delay, the boys all started off, first marking the -place so as to know where to go for the boat. Beaching the bank, they -gathered drift-wood, and logs, and fir-brush, with which they built a -fire on the beach at the foot of the cliff, where it adjoined the bank. -They had plenty of matches in their pockets, and soon the fire was -lighted; the flames rushed fiercely through the inflammable brush-wood, -and the boys kept gathering fresh fuel from all sides and heaping it on. - -“And now to cook our tea,” said Bart. “Let’s get a lot of stones, and -put them in the fire till they get red hot. Then we can draw them out, -and roast all our shell-fish splendidly.” - -This suggestion was at once acted on, and the boys gathered stones and -threw them in. - -After this they all went to work collecting driftwood from all sides, -till a large pile was heaped up, sufficient to last them through the -night. - -Then, in turn, each one took the hatchet and went up the bank, and cut -as much fir-brush as he considered necessary for a bed. The darkness had -increased, and the fog intensified it; but the towering flames, as they -leaped up, illumined the scene, affording them sufficient light to cut -the brush, and throwing a strong glare along the beach as far as the -place where their boat lay. - -And next, they pulled out the stones from the fire, and arranging some -of them in the sand, they laid the lobster on the top, and piled other -stones around them, till the lobster lay buried in an oven as good and -as serviceable as that of the best kitchen range. A number of shell-fish -were thrown on other stones, and the shrimps were easily cooked by being -laid on the top of a hot stone for a few minutes. While waiting for the -lobster, they appeased their hunger by cooking and eating these smaller -fry. - -“I never ate baked lobster,” said Bruce; “but I’ve heard that it’s the -best thing there is.” - -“We’ll soon judge for ourselves,” said Bart. “Only before we fairly sit -down to dine, let’s go off and draw the boat up farther.” - -Four of them started off. They found that already the tide had risen -so far that it was level with the bows. A long and vigorous exertion -enabled them to draw it up farther, and then they went back to the fire. - -By that time it was decided that the lobster had been baking long -enough, and it was accordingly uncovered. - -A cry of delight escaped them. - -There lay the lobster, brilliantly red, as though red hot from the oven, -and showing clearly the excellence of Bart’s contrivance. - -“That’s the way the Micmacs manage,” said Bart. “And they wouldn’t look -at a lobster that came out of a pot.” - -Ranging themselves around the lobster, in front of the fire, the boys -now began their repast. One and all pronounced it glorious. It was salt -enough and juicy enough to satisfy the most delicate palate; and the -severe exercise and long fast of the boys had given them appetites which -would have made a worse dish acceptable. - -“Well, boys,” said Bart, “here we are on a desert island, without a -penny in our pockets; but it isn’t a bad place, after all.” - -“I wonder if they will hunt after us.” - -“Of course they will.” - -“They ought to see this fire, at any rate.” - -“I thought of that, and expected to see some signs of them before this.” - -“Perhaps it’s too foggy.” - -“O, if they were within a mile of us, they’d see that light.” - -“I should think, if they came after us, they would have been within that -distance.” - -“O, we can’t tell. They may have got into another direction altogether.” - -“Well, I suppose they’ll find us some time.” - -“I’m sure I don’t care.” - -“Nor do I.” - -“Nor I.” - -“Nor I.” - -“We’ll have to prepare for life on a desert island. To-morrow we’ll -explore it, and build Our camp. It’s lucky we have a hatchet and a -pistol.” - -“It’s lucky we have lobsters.” - -“O, we’ll find lots of other things. There are sea-gulls’ eggs, I’ll -bet.” - -“And clams.” - -“And perhaps oysters.” - -“We’ll have to organize a government, and build a town. Wigwams will -make the best houses.” - -“No--spruce camps.” - -“O, wigwams are the only things that will keep the rain off.” - -“I wonder if we can find any birch bark.” - -“We must explore to-morrow.” - -“There’s one thing more to do to-night,” said Arthur. “For my part, I -don’t want to have to run down to that miserable boat every ten minutes -till high tide. I’ve had enough of her for one day. We must get her up -now. There’s a lot of round sticks in that pile, and we can use them as -rollers; so let’s go and get the boat up now.” - -This proposition was at once acted on. Four good round sticks were -found, and some others to serve as levers. With these the boys started -off to move the boat. - -They found it hard work, but practicable. The progress was slow, and it -took a good hour; but at last they had the satisfaction of seeing the -boat above high-water mark, and fastened to a piece of projecting rock. - -Then they selected sleeping places, and spread their beds. After this -they heaped up fresh fuel, and sat around the fire, making a hundred -plans for their desert life. Arthur was the only one who did anything. -He had found a piece of tough spruce, and with hatchet, and knife was -busily shaping it into an oar. - -At last they all retired to their beds, and slept. - - - - -VIII. - -_Blue Sky.--Building a House.--The Signal Staff.--A fatal -Disgust.--Mournful Forebodings._ - - -EARLY the next morning the boys were all up, quite refreshed, in -spite of their unaccustomed beds. They gathered the embers of the fire -together, and heaping on fresh fuel, started it into a blaze. Then they -proceeded to secure a breakfast. This could not be immediately attended -to, however, for the tide was not at its lowest ebb, and it was -necessary to wait for two or three hours. Enough shell-fish remained to -stay their appetites till something better could be procured. - -To their great joy, they saw that the fog had all gone. A warm, fresh -breeze was blowing, the sky was clear and cloudless, and the sun rose -brilliantly, casting his dazzling rays in a radiant flood of lustre -across the sea. If there had been any feeling of discontent, it would -have been dispelled by the grandeur of the scene. - -Some eight or ten miles away they saw the main land. Far away, on the -other side of the bay, they saw a line of hills, terminating in the -familiar form of Blomidon, while, looking along the beach, they saw -lying beyond this island the one on which they had landed the day -before. They now knew that they had drifted past that, and had gone -ashore on the adjoining one, and they could understand the whole of that -course which they had made blindly through the fog. It was with much -eagerness that they looked around for the schooner. But they saw no -traces of her whatever. The place where she had anchored was plainly -discernible, but she had gone. It was not difficult to know the reason -of this, since it was the very thing which they expected would happen. -But where was the schooner now? Which way had she gone? When would she -return? How could those on board possibly find them out? All these were -questions which it was not easy to answer. - -While waiting for the tide to fall, they wandered up the banks in order -to select some place suitable for a camp. It was not long before they -settled on a spot which seemed very suitable. Near where they had built -the fire, the cliff ended, and the side of the island became a wooded -slope. About fifty feet above the fire, there was a broad, open -platform, free from trees and covered with moss. Walking on beyond this, -they ascended to the edge of the cliff, where it stood up two hundred -feet above the shore. Here grew a solitary tree about fifty feet -high, and very conspicuous from its situation. Around it the rock was -uncovered in places. - -The discovery of these places filled them with delight. They had already -decided to build a camp, and the platform first mentioned seemed to all -to be very suitable. - -“But we must find a spring somewhere,” said Bruce, who, after his -night’s rest, declared himself as well as ever. - -“So we must,” said Bart. “Boys, let some of us hunt up a spring.” - -Off they went in different directions, and soon every one was shouting -out a discovery of water. In fact, in that damp and well-watered -country, springs can easily be found on every hill-side. The nearest one -was the best, and by breaking away some of the earth and digging a hole -with a stone in the clay of the bank, a well was rudely formed, which -was suitable for all immediate needs. - -By the time they had finished these explorations, the tide was -sufficiently low to admit of a search for their breakfast. All the boys -went off, since all were equally interested. The search was perfectly -successful, resulting in the capture of thirteen lobsters and a great -quantity of shrimps. Bringing back their prey in triumph, they heated a -large number of stones and cooked all the lobsters together, partly for -the sake of keeping them better, and partly that they might have a good -supply of ready-cooked provisions on hand. - -“Do you know, boys,” said Phil Kennedy, as they sat at breakfast, “I’ve -got an idea?” - -“Good for you. What is it?” - -“Why, we ought to have a signal.” - -“That’s true.” - -“Well, my plan is to have a signal up there,” said Phil, pointing to the -solitary tree on the top of the cliff. - -“How can you manage it?” - -“Why, turn that tree into a flag-staff by cutting off the branches., -I can climb it, and if I can have the hatchet for a little-while, I’ll -promise to get every branch off.” - -“Well, now, Phil,” said Bruce, “I call that a first-rate idea. But where -will you get a flag?” - -“I’ll fasten my red shirt on.” - -“Hurrah!” cried all, clapping Phil on the back. “Phil, you’re a genius.” - -“Talking about signals,” said Tom Crawford, “a flag won’t be enough. We -want something for nights and for foggy days. We ought to build a -heap of dry brush and kindling, and be ready to light it at a moment’s -notice. Perhaps it would be too much trouble to keep it going all -night.” - -“Yes; it would,” said Bruce. “The best thing would be to have a pile -ready to light. But the first thing to do is to build our camp, and -we’ll have lots of brush ready for the pile. Phil can have the hatchet -to trim the tree after we have cut the poles and things for the camp.” - -“What kind of a camp shall we have?” - -“A wigwam.” - -“Where’ll we get the birch bark?” - -“Explore the island.” - -“That’ll take too much time. We want a camp to-day, and a camp we must -have. The best way will be to build an ordinary one of poles and spruce -brush, and after that is built, we can look about for birch bark.” - -“And then I’ve got my oar to finish,” said Arthur, who had been working -on it at intervals all the morning. - -“Well,” said Bart, “suppose we go to work at the camp first. We’ll want -something to fasten it with. If you like, I’ll go and hunt after some -roots that I know of. They’ll do first rate for ropes.” - -“All right; and we’ll go and cut the poles.” - -Off they went, four of them after poles and brush, and Bart after roots -for ropes. The hatchet served to cut the poles, and the knives to trim -them. Four industrious boys, working diligently at this, soon laid low a -large number of straight, slender maple trees and an immense quantity -of fir branches. These they all dragged to that platform which they had -selected as the site of their house, and then looked about to find -the best situation for the temporary camp. As they expected to build a -better one, they chose a place which would not interfere with any future -operations. It was at the rear of the platform. Four trees grew there, -at nearly equal distances, in the form of a square. They determined -to adopt these trees as part of the frame of the camp, and use them as -corner posts. Bart had succeeded in finding an immense quantity of long, -flexible roots, some of which were sassafras roots, others the long -roots of willow trees, and all very tough and strong. First of all, -they laid four of their strongest poles from tree to tree, the rear pole -being about eight feet high, and the front one five feet. The side poles -sloped up from front to rear. There they stuck a large number of poles -into the ground in front, on the sides and in the rear, about a foot -apart, leaving space for a door and a window. Then they laid poles over -the top crosswise, so as to form a good foundation for a roof. All these -were firmly fastened, so that at last, when the frame was completed, it -was as secure as though it had been nailed together; in fact, much more -so. - -So far, all had been well and successfully accomplished; but the next -task was a more difficult one. This consisted in interweaving fir brush -between the poles, so that they should be firm and strong. Beginning at -the bottom, each bush was carefully inserted and pressed as closely down -as possible. It was a tedious process; but the five industrious boys -worked unweariedly, and at last had the satisfaction of seeing the rear -and the right side completed. Then they concluded to rest for a while -and dine. - -Cold lobster and cold water were all the fare that they could command; -but they ate with a good appetite, and greatly enjoyed the brief respite -from their hard work. After this was over, they returned to their task, -and at length completed the front and the left side. - -Now the roof remained. This was the most difficult task of all. Three -boys went on the roof, and two below handed up brush as fast as it was -required. They began at the lower side in front, and inserted the brush -so as to lie along the slope of the roof like thatch. The butt-end of -each bush was inserted, and the brush ends projected. The flat branches -of fir trees are of such a nature that they will lie very close to any -surface on which they may be placed. These brushes were all placed in -double layers; each upper row overlapped the lower one; and thus a roof -was formed thick and close enough to turn any ordinary fall of rain, -though, of course, it could not be expected to keep out the water in -case of a prolonged storm. After the roof was all covered, the last -brush at the upper edge was intertwined with others which were placed -across them, and these again were all securely fastened to the poles -below. - -Then their spruce camp was finished, and was almost an exact counterpart -of the one which they had built in the woods. They had done it well and -quickly, for long practice in this work in their own woods had given -them great skill in the construction of such buildings as these. - -The last thing to attend to was the beds. All the brush that remained -was brought inside and laid lengthwise at-the rear of the camp. Then -they went into the woods, and gathered an immense quantity of dry, soft -moss, which they spread over the spruce brush. In this way they formed a -bed large enough for the whole party, as soft as a hair mattress, and as -good as anything can be for the repose of a weary frame. - -This completed their work, and it was not yet sundown. They had worked -nobly; and when they stood out on the platform, and regarded their -handiwork, their delight burst forth in ringing cheers. - -And now Phil claimed the hatchet, so as to carry out his cherished -purpose of forming a signal staff. The others all went up to watch him -at his work. Phil climbed up without any difficulty, and began at the -upper branches, cutting away on a level with his waist, and using the -lower ones to stand on. Phil was skilful with his hatchet; the branches -were not large, and came tumbling down, beneath his strokes, with great -rapidity. These the boys below gathered together, and heaped up in a -pile, at a sufficient distance off to burn without injury to the signal -staff, and yet in such a situation that any flame would be conspicuous -to those on the sea. The work was soon accomplished; the last branch -fell, and Phil descended to the ground. Where the tree had lately been -there now arose a tall staff, naked, and ready to bear at its summit a -red shirt, a pair of trousers, or anything else which the fancy of Phil -might suggest as suitable to the place and the occasion. - -Meanwhile Arthur had gone to the beach, and returned with an armful of -shavings and choppings from the wood which he had been trying to fashion -into an oar. They were dry and fine, and were intended to serve as -kindling whenever the time might come for kindling the signal fire. - -And now one thing more remained to be done. They had decided to have -their fire on the platform in front of the camp--a place which was -greatly superior to the beach for such a purpose, and which also would -give them the advantage of a warm fire on a cool evening and a light -close by their dwelling-place. So they went out to collect drift-wood, -and carried up a large quantity to the place. Good stones were also -selected for cooking purposes, and the cold lobsters were carefully -brought from the beach, and deposited in the camp. But the labor of -carrying the drift-wood up the steep bank showed them that it would -be as well not to be too lavish with their fuel. In order to have the -cheerfulness of brilliant light along with the gratefulness of warmth, -they cut a quantity of brush, which they intended to throw on the fire -from time to time. Thus, with a comfortable camp, and soft beds of moss, -and plenty of fuel, and a pleasant fire, with food and drink, with fine -weather and a charming view, the “B. O. W. C.” might be considered as -tolerably happy. - -And so they would have been, if it had not been for one thing--a thing -which revealed itself to them during their evening repast, and soon -threw a gloom over their prospects. - -It was dark; the fire was lighted, and threw out a cheerful glow; the -cold lobster was brought out, and the boys began to partake. For some -time nothing was said. At last, the silence was broken by Bart. He had -been twisting a leg of the lobster fastidiously in his fingers, and -nibbling little morsels of it, in a way which did not look very much -like the fashion of a hungry boy who had done a good day’s work, when -suddenly he flung the lobster’s leg into the fire. - -“I can’t stand the abominable stuff any longer,” he cried. - -“Neither can I,” said Bruce. - -“Nor I”--“Nor I”--“Nor I”--said all the others; and the fragments of the -lobster were all contemptuously thrown away. - -“What are we going to do about it?” asked Tom Crawford, mournfully. - -“I wouldn’t care if there was even a raw potato,” said Bart, “or a -mouldy ship-biscuit, or an old dried turnip, or a bit of pork, or -anything else to eat with it so as to take off the edge of it; but to -eat nothing else but this everlasting lobster, lobster, lobster, is more -than I can stand.” - -“Tea last night,” said Tom Crawford, dolefully, “lobster. Breakfast this -morning, lobster. During the morning I felt hollow--lobster. At dinner, -lobster. For my part, I’ve had enough of it.” - -“What can we do?” - -“I’m tired of shrimps.” - -“Bother shrimps.” - -“O for a good slice of bread and butter!” - -“Or a good mealy potato!” - -“Or a beefsteak!” - -“Or crackers and cheese!” - -“What are we going to do? We’ll have to eat lobster, or starve.” - -“I feel,” said Phil, “that I’m growing to be a lobster myself; my skin -is turning quite hard.” - -“I’m beginning to lose faith in desert islands,” said Arthur. - -“Yes,--they’re a failure.” - -“But how do we know?” said Bart. “We haven’t explored yet. We don’t know -half of what may be on the island.” - -“We know pretty well what there is,” said Bruce. “Spruce trees, maple -trees, moss, and rocks,--that’s about all.” - -“Unfortunately, it isn’t a South Sea island, and so we can’t expect to -pull cocoa-nuts from the trees, or have bread-fruit for our breakfasts. -There are no mangoes, no bananas, no oranges, no grapes, no nothing, -unless we choose to eat bark and fir cones.” - -“The next time we try a desert island, boys, I move that we make tracks -for the Pacific Ocean,” said Arthur. - -“I second that motion,” cried Phil. - -“It’s rather odd,” said Bart, “that all of us should get tired of -lobster at the same time.” - -“It would be odder yet,” said Tom, “if any of us had been able to stand -it any longer.” - -“That’s about the thing,” said Bruce. “And so the question remains yet,” - said Arthur, “What are we going to do?” - -No one answered. They all sat looking at the fire. Phil seized some -brush and flung it on; the flames caught it, and crackled through it, -and dashed up fiercely and brightly, lighting up five very hungry, very -tired, and very discontented faces. - -“Hurrah!” cried Bart at last, starting to his feet. “Hurrah! I have it!” - -“What’s that?” - -“Gulls’ eggs!” said Bart. - -“Not bad,” said Bruce. “At any rate we can try it. Perhaps we may find -some young gulls. They eat young rooks in England; why shouldn’t young -gulls be good?” - -“We’ll try it to-morrow,” said Tom. - -“At any rate,” said Bart, “it all comes to this. We must explore the -island. I’ve got my pistol. Who knows what may turn up. We may come -across lots of rabbits, or, at any rate, wild fowl. Come, now, things -are not so bad after all. Tomorrow will show us what the chances are -for our dinner table.” - -This was now the only consolation they had. The lobsters had grown -abhorrent, and they could not think of touching them any more. Hungry as -they were after all their hard work, they threw aside the only food that -they could get. They were compelled to go supperless to bed, and there -dream of more agreeable food. Fortunately, though they could not eat, -they could sleep; and soon all were wandering far away in the land of -Nod. - - - - -IX. - -_Exploring.--A wild Walk.--On the Lookout for Prey.--What is it?--Is -it a wild Goose?--Tremendous Sensation, the Explorers being as much -astounded as Robinson Crusoe was when he discovered the human Footprints -in the Sand._ - - -ON the following morning, all were up by daybreak, and Bruce could -think of nothing but gulls’ eggs. In the desperate extremity of hunger -to which they were reduced through their dislike to lobsters, they -determined to make a search along the cliffs for nests. They walked -along, and at length came to a place where some nests had been built. -They found a large number of eggs here, and appropriated them all. On -cooking them, they found them of a peculiar flavor, yet eatable, and -they congratulated themselves on their good luck. - -They now determined to put into execution their cherished plan of -exploring the island. One was to stay behind to attend to the signal, -and lots were drawn to see who it would be. It fell on Phil, who at once -accepted his task with great cheerfulness, and informed them that he -would make an omelet on a hot stone. In this pleasing occupation they -left him, and went into the woods. - -They found the woods here precisely like those of the other island. Fir, -and spruce, and maple grew densely together, and beneath all there was -a thick underbrush, with fallen trees, and ferns, and moss. Progress, -under such circumstances, was exceedingly difficult; but they knew that -the island was quite small, and so they kept on their way. The grounds -continually ascended for a long distance, and this, of course, added -somewhat to the difficulty of the journey; but at last the ascent -ceased, and they knew that they were on the summit of the island. -Nothing could be seen, however. So thick was the forest, that it shut -out all the view; nor was it of any use to climb a tree, ‘for all were -of nearly equal size, and if they were to climb up as far as they could, -they would only find the view obstructed by the tops of trees growing -around. So they kept on their way, and found the ground descending -continuously in an easy slope. The wood was as dense as ever, and no -living thing appeared. They had started with vague ideas of meeting with -hares or wild fowl, but thus far nothing had been visible except the -gulls overhead. They began to think that there was nothing but gulls -on the island. Bart, however, assured them that they could not judge as -yet, and expressed his unshaken confidence that he would start a rabbit -before the day was done. He had his pistol in his belt, and he was -determined to use it before going home, even if he had to shoot a gull. -So they kept on down the descent, expecting every moment to come in -sight of the bay. - -At last the woods grew thinner, and before them they saw the sky through -the trees. Moving farther forward, the trees grew more scattered, and -in a short time they found themselves at the top of a long, open ground, -which sloped to the bay, and was overgrown with moss and low brushwood. -At the farther end of the open, a small eminence arose, with some bushes -on the summit. Before them the waters of the bay spread out, with the -distant horizon skirted by a range of hills. - -“Here’s the place for rabbits,” said Bart, “if there are any.” - -“If there are any! Of course,” said Bruce; “that’s the point.” - -They walked on through the brush-wood, and at length, reaching a mossy -knoll, they sat down to rest. After a time, Bart started off alone to -pursue his investigations. He had not gone far before he stopped, and -shrunk back. Then he looked around with a triumphant expression. Then he -moved forward in a stealthy manner. - -“I wonder what’s up now,” said Bruce. - -“Bart’s found something at last,” said Arthur. - -“A hare, perhaps,” said Tom. - -The three boys started after Bart. Scarcely had they moved a half dozen -paces, when Bart took aim and fired. A loud cry was heard, a large white -bird was seen jumping in the air, and falling to the ground, and then -Bart ran forward and secured his prize. - -The other boys hurried up to him. As they came, he turned to meet them, -with a face flushed with triumph, and holding the large white bird by -the legs. - -“What is it?” they cried. - -“A wild goose,” said Bart. - -“A wild goose!” cried Bruce, who had reached him by that time. “A tame -one you mean.” - -“No it isn’t, either. How can it be a tame one? It’s a wild one.” - -“No, Bart,” said Arthur, “it’s a tame goose--as tame as I am.” - -“You’re a tame goose yourself,” said Bart. “Do you call that a tame -goose? Why, it’s a wild one, of course. Look at its wings.” - -“What about its wings? They’re tame enough. No, Bart, it’s the real -original domestic goose of the civilized farm-yard.” - -“Nonsense! as though I don’t know a tame goose when I see one.” - -“Well, you see one now.” - -“No, I don’t.” - -“This is one.” - -“No.” - -“Yes.” - -“No.” - -“It is.” - -“Pooh!” - -“Bart,” said Bruce, “did you ever see a live wild goose?” - -“No, I never did.” - -“Aha! How do you know anything about them, then?” - -“Why, I’ve seen pictures,--lots of thorn,--and they look just like -this.” - -“But I’ve seen wild geese living and flying,--and dead, too, lots -of times,--and this isn’t one.” - -“O, this is a kind that you are not acquainted with. Why, there are ever -so many kinds of wild geese.” - -But at this moment the boys were rudely interrupted. - -“Aha! ye thafes of the wurruld, ye!” cried a loud voice close -beside them. “Ye villains, ye. What are ye doin’,--a murdherin’ and -slaughterin’ a poor man’s property. Ye blackgyards, ye! What d’ye mane -by comin’ here and shootin’ my geese?” - -Thunderstruck at this unexpected interruption, the boys turned, and -found themselves face to face with an old, grizzled, red-faced little -Irishman, whose furious gestures and angry eyes were directed menacingly -toward them. - -“Which af ye’s shot my goose?” he roared. - -“1 did,” said Bart, quietly. - -“Ye young villain! I’ll make ye pay for it,--and dear, too,--as sure as -me name’s Denny O’Rafferty. What’r ye’s doin’ here, any how? What d’ye -mane by shootin’ my goose? D’ye think I’m goin’ to be robbed be a gang -of black-gyards? Be the powers! if ye think that same, ye’ll find ye’re -mistaken, bad scran till ye!” - -“Mr. O’Rafferty,” said Bart, “you’re quite mistaken. We’re honest boys, -and came here by accident.” - -“What did ye shoot the goose for, then, ye imp of mischief?” - -“It was a mistake,” said Bart, coolly. “Of course I didn’t know it was -yours,--in fact, I wasn’t aware that anybody was living here. I will -be happy to pay you whatever you think it’s worth,-and am sorry for the -mistake.” - -At this speech O’Rafferty’s face and manner underwent a complete change. - -“Ach, be the powers! if that’s all,” said he, good humoredly, “then we -won’t say any more about it. But how did ye’s get here? I didn’t see any -boat. Where did ye land, then?” - -“Why, the fact is, we were brought here,” said Bart, who went on to tell -him all about their adventure. - -Dennis O’Rafferty listened to every word with intense interest, his face -undergoing a perpetual change of expression, that spoke of conflicting -emotions. - -“Be the powers, then,” he exclaimed, as Bart ceased, “it was a narrow -scratch that ye had of it. An’ ye’ve been ashore here two nights. Be -jabers, it’s meself that’s ashamed of what I said till ye about the -goose. Have ye’s had anything till ate thin, at all?” - -“Nothing but lobster.” - -“Lobster! Well, thin, let me inforrum ye’s that ye’ll find that a -moighty onwholesome diet. An’ you’ve been here all that time wid nothin’ -at all to ate. Be jabers, I’m the boy for ye’s. Come along, boys. Ye’ll -find old O’Rafferty can give ye a breakfast, at any rate. Come along. -Ye’re starvin’, so ye are. Me old woman ‘ll be deloighted to set eyes on -ye’s. Never mind the goose; I’ll give ye’s a dozen for nothin’. Lave -it lie there; the old woman ’ll come an’ pick it for ye. Come along, -boys.” - -And the old fellow led the way; while the boys, delighted at the turn -which things had taken, followed gayly after. - -“And so ye’r Docthor Porther’s boys, are ye’s?” continued Dennis. -“Faith it’s himself ’ll be throubled. It’s a long time I’ve knowed -the docthor. An’ there isn’t his shuparior in the counthry. Arrah, be me -sowl, but it’s meself that’s glad to see ye’s. The sight of yer young, -fresh faces does good till me old bones. Come along, boys. And is the -docthor with ye’s in the schooner? Come along; ye haven’t fur to go. -I’ve got a bit of a house around beyant. Ye’ll see it as soon as iver we -turrun the hill.” - -On rounding the hill, they saw a clearing of about thirty acres, with a -boat drawn up on the shore, while close by them was a small house and -a barn. An old woman at the door looked up at them in speechless -amazement. - -“It’s the owld woman,” said O’Rafferty. “It’s herself that’s dead bate -at the sight of ye’s.” - -“Lard save us, Dinny, what in the wurruld have ye got there, thin?” - cried the old woman, as the party reached the house. - -“It’s some of Docthor Porther’s boys, that’s been gettin’ themselves -shipwracked on the other side,” said O’Rafferty, “and haven’t had a bite -to ate for two days, savin’ an’ exceptin’ a bit of cowld lobster, which -isn’t aisy aitin’. An’ however they got ashore on there, widout oars, -bates me intirely,--widout countin’ that thim same has been workin’ like -slaves a day or more, on impty stomachs, buildin’ a camp and carryin’ -fire-wood, which is hard enough work to kill a man, let alone boys like -these. And so stir yer stumps, Molly avick, and bring out praties an’ -bacon, the best ye have, and a drawin’ of tay, an’ chayse, an’ bread -and butter. It’s starvin’ they all are intoirely, or me name’s not Dinny -O’Rafferty.” - -“Ah, thin,” cried the old woman, “the saints stand betune us and harrum. -What’s that ye’r sayin’, Dinny O’Rafferty? Is it shipwracked ye wer’, -thin, ye darlin’s of the wurruld? Sure it’s not much an owld woman like -me can do for the likes of ye; but I’ll give ye the best I’ve got, so I -will. Sure an’.it’s starvin’ ye must be, if ye’ve had nothin’ to ate for -so long.” - -Nothing could exceed the kindness and warmth of welcome which O’Rafferty -and his wife gave the boys. The old woman bustled about, and kindled a -fire, and put on the pot and kettle, and laid the table, occasionally -stopping to look at the boys, one after the other, with a peculiar -fondness of expression and a low, crooning noise, such as nurses make -over children. - -“Sure it’s like a breath of fresh air to a captive in a dungeon to look -at your swate faces,” she cried. “Niver a boy’s face have I seen since -the dark day when my own boy took his swate face from me eyes foriver. -An’ that was fifteen year ago. An’ we came here, an’ lived here ever -since.” - -The old woman gave a long sigh, and sitting down, she held her head in -her hands, rocking herself to and fro. - -“Ah, well,” she said, getting up and going out to the barn, “it’s not -much longer to live we have thin.” - -“Fifteen years,” said O’Raflerty, as his wife went out. “It’s fifteen -years since we lost the boy. We lived in Parrsboro, an’ had as nice a -house and farm as the likes of us could ever wish for. But whin we lost -him, we lost all heart for the place. The old woman wud have died if she -had staid; an’ so I bought this bit of a place, an’ what with farmin’ -an’ fishin’ we manage to grub along, though it’s seldom or niver that we -see anybody but our own two selves. Well, well; wud ye like to look at -the place?” he continued, rising. “It isn’t much of a place; but it’s -not long we have to live, and it’ll do for us.” - -They followed the old man about. The place extended over thirty acres, -with a nice beach in front for the boat. It was an easy declivity, with -pasture lands behind the house. The boat was a large whaler, and nets -were spread on the grass to dry. O’Rafferty said that during the summer -he had visits sometimes from old friends, and at other times people -landed to see about the chances for sporting or getting minerals; but -never, since he had been there, had a boy been on shore, and his wife -had not seen a boy since she lost her son. He took them all over the -place, and finally led them to a little enclosure, not far from the -house. Inside was a grave mound, and at the head a white wooden slab, -with these words painted upon it: - - In Memoriam. - - Michael O’Rafferty, - - beloved son of - - Dennis and Mary O’Rafferty, - - born Aug. 2, 1830, - - died June 5, 1845. - - Requiescat in Pace. - -The old man stood in silence, bareheaded, looking at the inscription. -The boys removed their hats, and looked in solemn sympathy at the -bereaved father, whose love and yearning for his lost boy were still -so manifest, that the sight of a boy’s face could renew his grief after -fifteen vanished years. Standing thus in silence, and reverencing that -grief, they waited till the old man turned away, and then followed him, -without a word, back across the field, and into the house. - -As they entered, the savory smell of broiled bacon came gratefully to -their nostrils. The table was spread with delicious mealy potatoes, -brown crusty bread, butter as yellow as gold, and clean, spotless -plates.. If they had the power of wishing and gaining, they would have -desired nothing better than this. - -“Mr. O’Rafferty,” said Bart, suddenly, “I forgot to mention that -we left one of our number on the beach. I will take a run across the -island, with your permission, and bring him here, for he is as hungry as -we are, if not more so.” - -“Another one!” cried O’Rafferty. “An’ waitin’ on the beach! Why didn’t -ye tell me before?” - -“Well, you see we were tired with our scramble, and I wanted to get -rested before starting back. But I’ll go now, if you’ve no objection.” - -“Deed, thin, an’ I have an objection,” cried O’Rafferty. “D’ye think I’d -let ye go starvin’ back agin before ye’d got a bite to ate? or, for that -matter, d’ye think I’d let ye go at all? No; I’ll go meself.” - -“You? O, no. I won’t allow that,” began Bart. “It’s meself ‘ll go, an’ -nobody else,” cried O’Rafferty, positively. “Ye’r all too hungry an’ -tired. Besides, ye don’t know a step of the way. Ye came through -the woods, an’ a mighty tough job ye found it; but I know an aisier -way--it’s a path of me own. Ye said it was at the other end of the -island, on the other side.” - -“Yes; at a rock with a tree on the edge.” - -“I know the place well. My path comes out close by there. I wonder ye -didn’t come across it.” - -“It is a wonder. We certainly would have noticed anything like a path, -if we had found one.” - -“Well, it’s all the same now. Ye’ll jist stay here, an’ sit down an’ ate -yer breakfasts like Christians, an’ I’ll go an’ bring the boy. Not one -of ye shall stir a step--not one step.” - -“Well, Mr. O’Rafferty, I’m sure you are putting yourself to too much -trouble--” - -“Throuble! D’ye call it throuble? Sure an’ isn’t it the brightest day -I’ve knowed for iver so long?” - -“Deed it is,” chimed in his wife. “Be off wid ye, Dinny dear, and hurry -back with the poor boy. Sure I’ll keep the tay hot for him, an’ the -praties, an’ the bacon.” - -Any further remonstrance or objection was out of the question; so -the boys took their seats at the table. The old man started off, and -promised to be back in a “jiffy.” - -He ascended the slope behind the house, and entered the woods by a -pathway which, though but little trodden, was yet easy to traverse. Far -different was this from the rough way by which the boys had crossed the -island; and in far less time than they had taken, Denny approached the -other shore. The pathway led down to the beach, about a hundred yards -below the place where they had built their first fire. - -As he descended, a singular sight met his eyes. - - - - -X. - -_New Attempts at Cookery.--Phil on the Lookout.--A Sail! A Sail!--The -Signal of the red Shirt.--The Home of the O’Raffertys._ - - -WE left Phil behind, on the beach. - -After the others had departed, Phil occupied himself with making -arrangements to while away the time. First of all, he set to work to try -and make an omelet. After a long search on the beach, he found some clam -shells, which he took up to the platform; and then, selecting some flat -stones, he threw them into the fire. Then he mixed some eggs in one of -the shells, and tried to beat them with his jackknife. His success was -not exactly dazzling; but he was satisfied to a certain extent, and -intensely interested. At length, drawing forth one of the stones, which, -by this time, was red hot, he poured the mixture on its surface. There -was a fizzle, a steam, a hiss, and then a horrible smell of burnt egg. -Phil made an awful face, and giving the stone a kick, sent it flying -down to the beach, omelet and all. - -Not at all discouraged, he began again _ab ovo_. Drawing out another -stone, he determined to give it time to cool. So he mixed up some more -eggs in the shell; and after waiting patiently for a long time for the -stone, he at length thought it was cool enough, and poured the mixture -upon it. It certainly had grown cool this time in fact, somewhat too -cool, as Phil gradually learned, when, after waiting patiently, he found -that there was no appearance of any progress whatever in the cookery. -So this, too, was a failure, and Phil disdainfully hurled it after its -predecessor. - -But he was not discouraged even yet. Once more he took his shell and -made another mixture, and then drew forth the stone, and carefully -watched it, trying it from time to time with the tip of his finger, to -see if it was of the proper temperature. Having singed the tips of all -his fingers, he concluded that it was time to stop that mode of testing, -and run the risk of an actual trial. So he once more poured the mixture -on the stone. Aha! this time there was no mistake. A pleasant steam -came up, which was grateful to a famished boy. The only trouble was, -the lower part was done before the upper was in the least affected; and -worse still, it began to burn while the upper part was raw. Phil was -not yet disheartened, however; and drawing his knife, he made desperate -efforts to insert it under the omelet, so as to turn it over. But these -efforts were not successful. He only succeeded in intermixing all -together in a mess, and mangling it into a general mush. In trying to -taste some of it, he found in his mouth nothing but a very unpleasant -mixture of raw and burnt egg. With a sigh he relinquished his -experiments, and sent this stone after the others. - -He now contented himself with roasting two of them; and having partaken -of them, he sauntered up the hill to the signal station. Here he lay -down, and looked lazily out at the water. - -Scarcely had he done so, than he gave a start. An object was before his -eyes which he had not been able to see from the platform. The other end -of the island could not be seen from there, because a projecting bank -shut it out from view; but from here there was a fair view of the other -islands. And there, just coming out from behind Pinnacle Island, was a -schooner of the size and rig of the Antelope, and he did not doubt for -a moment but that it was their schooner. She was now sailing along, and -was not far from that very anchorage where he had seen her last. - -With a shout and a wild beating of his heart, he sprang to his feet, and -stared, with eager eyes, upon the schooner. - -She was coming on very well, with a good breeze, and was coming in his -direction. Would she continue on her course? If so, she would soon be -there. Would she turn aside, and pass through the channel that separated -the islands, or sail away to the main land opposite? The thought was -intolerable. He had grown weary of desert life; he longed to leave the -island,--or, rather, he longed to get something to eat. - -So he rushed away to the pile of brush, and lighting his matches,--a -whole card at a time,--he touched up the kindling wood, and in a few -moments the blaze was spreading through the mass of dry brush. Soon the -flames rose high into the air, bearing with them vast volumes of black -smoke. - -Would they see that signal? They could not help seeing it. Would they -understand it? Ah! that was another question. Still it came on in the -same direction, without showing any signs of turning either to the right -hand or the left. And now it had passed the channel between the islands, -and was coming along in a line with the beach below, and not more than -half a mile out. - -The brush fire was burning briskly, and could last for half an hour -without replenishing; but something more was needed. What could he do? -At first he thought of running down to the beach and shouting. But then -he feared that he might not be seen on the beach, and that his voice -might not be heard. So that plan was rejected. One only remained, and -that was, to climb the signal-staff. In an instant all this had passed -through his mind, and in another instant it was acted upon. He tore off -his red shirt, tied the sleeves together loosely, and hung it around his -neck, and then, with wonderful agility, climbed the tree till he reached -the top. The stumps of the branches, which remained on the trunk of -the tree, formed a good foothold, and he was able to stand securely, -clasping the tree with one arm, while with the other he took his shirt -from around his neck, and waved it to and fro in the air. Below, and -about thirty feet on one side, the fire blazed; and there, fifty feet -in the air, on that solitary tree, stood the boy, waving, wildly and -incessantly, the brilliant scarlet cloth. He felt that he had done the -best, and if this would not attract attention, nothing would. - -All this time the schooner came on, and at length came nearly opposite. -Phil saw the crowd on board. He saw them staring and gesticulating. He -was recognized--he was safe! Yes, there was Mr. Long,--he knew that tall -figure in black,--and he was going to the stern. What for? Aha! wasn’t -that glorious? He had gone and had seized the ropes, and lowered and -hoisted the flag again a score of times. Ha, ha, ha! What flag? What -flag? Why, their own flag,--the flag of the “B. O. W. C.,”--which had’ -evidently been waving there ever since their departure, and now saluted -them as it brought them safety. - -Phil’s merry laughter rang out loud and clear, as he saw all this, in -his excitement and his joy. He saw the schooner head in straight toward -the shore, then sweep round; and then down rattled her anchor, her sails -fell, and she lay waiting. - -Phil gave a final wave and a loud, shout; and then, descending the tree, -he scampered down the slope and along the beach, as fast as his little -legs would carry him, until at last he reached the verge of the shore -opposite the schooner. Here he gave a loud hurrah. His shrill voice -reached the schooner, which was only a short distance off, and was -responded to by a loud cheer from all on board. - -“Where are the other boys?” cried Mr. Long. - -“In the woods; they’ll be here soon.” - -“Where’s the boat?” - -“Up there,” said Phil, pointing to where it lay. - -“We can’t get ashore. We’ve got no boat.” - -“When the tide gets up, and the boys come back, we can get the boat -out,” said Phil. - -“How are you all?” cried Mr. Long. - -“Very well, but nearly starved.” - -Instantly Mr. Long disappeared into the cabin. Returning shortly, he had -a bundle in his hand, around which a string was tied. Then taking one -end of the string, and whirling it violently around, sling fashion, he -hurled it through the air toward the shore. The parcel fell about twenty -feet beyond Phil. He ran to it, and, on opening it, found a quantity of -sandwiches. - -The ravenous way in which he devoured the sandwiches showed to those on -board, far more powerfully than words, how famished poor Phil must have -been. - -“Will the others be back soon?” asked Mr. Long. - -“O, yes. They’ve gone across the island to explore.” - -“Were you able to sleep?” - -“Sleep? O, yes, first rate.” - -“How?” - -“In the camp up there,” said Phil, with his mouth full of sandwich, -waving his hand in the direction of the platform. “We’d have enjoyed it -if we’d only had some sandwiches,” he added after a time, as he made a -fresh onslaught on the parcel. - -It was now about eleven o’clock, and not quite half tide. The tide was -rising, however, and in due time would be up to the boat; and then, if -the boys did not come, they might get in near enough to throw Phil a -line, and from the schooner pul the boat into the water. For the present -it was necessary to wait; so Phil ate his sandwiches, and talked with -those on board. And this was the scene which met the eyes of Dennis -O’Rafferty as he descended to the beach. - -Dennis soon understood it all. Ge saw that the schooner had been -searching for the boys, and had come here in their absence, and had -found this boy. He hurried, without delay, to the beach, and at once -told Phil where his friends were, and explained to those on board the -schooner what they were doing, and why he had come. - -“An’ is the docthor on board?” - -“No; he didn’t come.” - -“Ah, thin it’s mesilf that’s sorry for that same,” said Dennis. - -On understanding the difficulty about the boat, he at once set himself -to work remedying it. He found the rollers which the boys had used, and -the poles; and then, with Phil’s assistance, he began to push her down -toward the water. It was far easier pushing her down than it had been -pulling her up, and the boat soon reached the water’s edge. - -“We lost our oar, and we were making another. I don’t know whether you -can use it or not,” said Phil. “Wait here, and I’ll go and get it.” - -On bringing it, Dennis found it quite rough, of course, but still -capable of working the boat along. So he launched the boat, and Phil -jumped in, and Dennis followed; and in a short time the boat touched -the vessel’s side. The current just here was not strong, for it was half -tide, and the vessel was very close to the shore. Phil was dragged -on board by a dozen hands, and nearly suffocated by their rapturous -greetings. - -Mr. O’Rafferty then explained again where the other boys were, and -invited all on board to come to his house and meet them. His invitation -was eagerly complied with. Another oar was found on board, and soon -Messrs. Simmons and Long, with all the boys, were on the beach. - -Then they started. Phil insisted on showing the camp and the signal -station, and told them all about their experience in shell-fish and -lobsters. - -Then they followed O’Rafferty across the island to his house. - -On the way, Mr. Long told Phil all about the dismal voyage of the -schooner after them. After cruising all about the Basin of Minas on the -previous day, they had decided to come back to the Five Islands, and -search along the shores, with the hope of finding them, or at least -some traces of them. They had been watching the shore of this island so -closely, that they had seen the first flash of the fire on the signal -station. When they saw the red shirt by it, and then the figure climbing -the tree, they knew that their search was at last successful. He made -Phil tell him, over and over again, all about his own eventful escape, -and shuddered to think how extreme their peril had been. - -The walk over O’Rafferty’s path was a most delightful one to all. The -fearful cloud, that had so long hung over them, was at last dispelled, -and in their reaction from sorrow, they all felt the wildest extreme of -joy. So the boys went on with shouts, and songs, and laughter, till they -reached their destination. - -There the others had finished their repast, and were waiting for Phil. -Great was their amazement to see the crowd. At once all was explained. -With a wild cry of delight, they rushed to meet their friends, and their -hands were nearly shaken off by their excited comrades. - -Mr. O’Rafferty then left them, and Mrs. O’Rafferty prepared a repast for -the company. But first she set before Phil the good things that she had -been saving for him; and, though that young gentleman had disposed of an -immense quantity of sandwiches, he yet was able--thanks to his -excellent appetite and vigorous constitution--to do full justice to Mrs. -O’Rafferty’s tea and cream, and brown crusty bread and golden butter, -and rich bacon, and mealy potatoes. Then the table was once more spread -for the other guests; and they found the repast an agreeable change from -the ship stores on which they had been feeding. To tell the truth, there -were many among the company who were as famished, and had eaten quite -as little, during the last twenty or thirty hours, as the castaways -themselves. - -They then strolled about the fields and along the beach, till suddenly a -shout from one of the boys attracted the attention of all. - -There, coming round the point, was the familiar form of the Antelope, -her boat towed behind her once more; Captain Corbet, the mate, and -O’Rafferty on board, and the black flag of the “B. O. W. C.” floating -gloriously aloft. - -“It’s been there all the time,” said Billymack. “Wasn’t it odd? Mr. Long -wouldn’t let any one pull it down.” - -“And all the schooners laughed at us,” said Bogud. “It was such -nonsense.” - -“Nonsense?” said Bart. “Far from it, Bogud. There’s good luck in that -emblem. So long as it floats on the breeze, we’ll turn out all right.” - -“If you call this good luck, I should like to know what bad luck is.” - -Here the anchor rattled, and all the boys ran to the beach. - -When the time came for them to leave, O’Rafferty was in despair. He -wanted them to stay at least one night. But Mr. Long could not. They had -already lost much time, and must make amends for it. They had to go that -evening to Pratt’s Cove. So O’Raflerty consoled himself by extorting -a promise that the next time they came to the Five Islands they would -anchor off his beach, and stop at least two days with him. - -Meanwhile the boys had a long debate as to what they could give to -O’Raflerty. To offer money would be an insult. They had to select -from among their possessions something that would be appropriate for -a parting gift. Bart proposed his pistol, but it was considered as not -adapted to be of use to O’Rafferty. At last it was decided to give him -the hatchet. A hatchet would always be useful; and it was so pretty a -little tool, that it would be in itself a graceful keepsake. So Bart, -with his jackknife, cut into the handle, very, neatly, the initials of -the different members of the “B. O. W. C.,” and handed the gift to the -old man. - -“You won’t refuse it,” said Bart, “will you, Mr. O’Rafferty?” And he -explained the initial letters to him. - -Tears started to the old man’s eyes. - -“It’s fairly heart-broken I am to part wid ye; but I’ll take the hatchet -to remember yer sweet faces by, and wid the hope that you won’t forget -owld O’Rafferty. And many’s the drame I’ll be draimin’ about yes, till -me owld eyes gets a look at yes again.” - -“An’ may the blessin’s av Heaven go wid yes all, ye darlin’s av the -worruld,” ejaculated the old woman. “It’s meself that’ll pray for yes, -that the Lard ‘ll stan’ betune yes and harrum. I’ll be lookin’ out for -yes all another year, jewels; an’ I’ll have such crame, chayse, an’ -such maily taters, as ye never saw the like of before.” - -The old couple wrung the hands of all of them, and watched them embark. -Soon all were on board. Then the anchor went up, and up went the sails. -The schooner started, and moved slowly away. - -And as she moved away, the boys saw the old couple standing on the beach -waving farewells. There they stood till the vessel rounded a promontory -which shut them from sight. - -They were on their way to Pratt’s Cove. - - - - -XI. - -_Pratt’s Cove.--A Dinner Party.--The faithless Cook and -Steward.--Songs.--Sudden and startling Interruption.--Stealing a -Wood-pile.--Overwhelming Piece of Intelligence._ - - -THE wind and tide were both, rather unfavorable, and it was late before -they reached Pratt’s Cove. This place is formed by the bed of a creek -which runs up from the bay, and, like all the streams of these waters, -is subject to very great variations, being fordable at low tide, but -at high tide deep enough to float a ship. It was half tide when they -arrived, and the schooner was able to run a little way up the stream, -where she anchored. It was quite dark, but they could see that the -nearest land was a projecting point, clear of trees, and promising -a pleasanter camping-ground than the hold of the schooner. It was -therefore unanimously decided to go ashore, kindle a fire, and pass as -festive an evening as possible. The shore was close by, and in a very -short time they were all out of the vessel. Plenty of fuel lay there in -the shape of a long pile of dry birch wood which lay heaped up along -the shore. To this they helped themselves, kindled an enormous fire, and -were soon seated around it, waiting for their evening repast. - -At the outset of the trip, Johnny Blue and Sammy Ram - -Ram had been appointed steward and cook, owing to their personal -application for those very honorable offices. Their duties had been very -light; in fact, partly on account of rough weather, and partly owing -to the anxiety of the previous day, there had been little or no occasion -for their services. It was therefore expected that on the present -occasion they would surpass themselves and astonish everybody by the -brilliancy of their performance. As the party sat round the fire waiting -for their repast, they all anticipated something of extraordinary -excellence, and were impatient for the banquet to begin. Sammy and -Johnny Blue, however, made no very great haste. In fact, it seemed to -some that they were astonishingly slow, if not reluctant. Slowly they -turned over the things, slowly they opened and shut the boxes and -baskets, and very slowly indeed they took out the dishes. - -“See here, you fellows,” cried Bruce, suddenly. “You don’t appear to be -aware of the fact that we’re all starving.” - -“Hurry up your cakes!” cried another. - -“Come, be quick about it, Sammy Ram Ram! What’s the use of being so -particular?” - -“Tumble out the things any way! We don’t want a regular set table.” - -Sammy and Johnny quickened their motions a little, and said they would -be ready “in a minute.” - -Meanwhile Messrs. Simmons and Long, assisted by the devoted Bogud, -had been sorting their minerals’ in a general way, and wrapping each -specimen in paper. Two good-sized baskets were filled, and many of them -were very fine indeed. There were some fern prints, and some tracks of -birds on sandstone, which Mr. Long had found, and which he regarded with -the tenderest admiration. There was a very excellent amethyst, found by -Mr. Simmons, some mica, some barytes, and, above all, a piece of quartz, -in which faint flecks of gold were visible. It was taken from a vein -which ran up the cliff, and was a foot or more in thickness. It seemed -to promise a rich gold harvest to any one who might choose to try -gold-crushing in so remote a place. - -The tender interest excited by all these treasures, and the occupation -of putting them into separate baskets, had so fully engrossed their -thoughts, that they had not noticed any particular delay. At last, -however, the work was done; and then it was that Mr. Long thought about -the claims of appetite. - -He started to his feet. - -“What!” he cried, as he looked around; “not ready yet? Why, what’s the -matter?” - -“In a minute,” said Sammy Ram Ram. - -“Yes, yes--in a minute,” chimed in Johnny Blue. - -“A minute? Well, that’s longer than I can wait. So come along, all -of us!” said Mr. Long, advancing to the place where a cloth had been -spread. The rest all followed. - -There was a very meagre repast--in fact, but the beginning of a -repast--before them. - -“Come, hurry up!” said Mr. Long, as he and Mr. Simmons, followed by the -rest, threw themselves on the grass around the table-cloth. “Fetch along -some of the turkey and chickens quick!” There was no response. Sammy and -Johnny both stood looking excessively guilty. - -“Come, hurry up! We can’t eat ham and-biscuit. Why, what’s the matter?” - -“Why--there--there isn’t any,” stammered Sammy. - -“What’s that?” cried Mr. Long. - -“The turkey--it’s all gone, sir.” - -“Gone!” cried Mr. Long, in amazement. “What do you mean?” - -And twelve astonished faces confronted the cook and steward. - -“Why, sir,” said the cook, “you see we ate a good many before we -started.” - -“Yes, sir. There were eight turkeys eaten that evening and next -morning.” - -“And fifteen chickens, sir.” - -“And ten mince pies,” added the steward, gathering courage at the sound -of his own voice. - -“And all the cheese,” responded the cook. “And most of the tarts.” - -“And a good deal of the cake.” - -“And a good many of the ham sandwiches, and half of the eggs, and--” - -“And ever so much ginger beer.” - -“The boys were, eating, sir, steadily through the night.” - -“And through the next day, till they got sick, and couldn’t eat any -more.” - -To this all present listened in the utmost astonishment, and without -saying a single word. - -“So we ate most of the things before we left--did we?” asked Mr. Long, -with a sour smile. “Yes, sir.” - -“How many turkeys did we leave with?” - -“Seven, sir.” - -“And how many chickens?” - -“Four, sir.” - -“And how many mince pies?” - -“Eight, sir.” - -“Have we eaten all these since?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -“Well,” said Jiggins, “all day yesterday I only ate one ham sandwich, -and to-day only a turkey drumstick, except at O’Rafferty’s.” - -“I ate a mince pie yesterday,” said Billymack “and another one -to-day--that’s all.” - -“Well, well, I’m not inquiring into what you ate, boys,” said Mr. Long, -good-humoredly. “I was only amazed to find that our stores had gone so -fast. We’ll have to live on clams, or go home, unless we can buy some -provisions here. Well, well,” he concluded, with a sigh, “we’ll have to -attack this ham bone. Here, cook; isn’t there any more ham left?” - -“One more, sir.” - -“Any pie?” - -“A half of a mince pie, sir.” - -“Hm--well--we’ll have to wait till to-morrow--that’s all. It’s my own -fault, I suppose. I didn’t make allowance for the appetites of growing -boys.” - -“Especially of the cook and steward,” growled Bogud. - -They had to bear with their disappointment as best they could. The cook -and steward looked very meek and subdued, for though nothing was said, -yet they felt that they were under a ban. The repast consisted of -nothing but bread and butter, and ham, and cold water. But still, as -they all had excellent appetites, they ate with a relish what was before -them, and had no trouble, except about provisioning the ship for the -future. It was tacitly understood, however, that Sammy Ram Ram and -Johnny Blue should be henceforth relieved from these onerous and -responsible duties. The repast was at length finished, and Messrs. -Simmons and Long went aside to take another look at their beloved -specimens, and speculate upon the probabilities of gold-mining at the -Five Islands. The others sat round the fire. Captain Corbet sat, with -a patriarchal smile, surveying the young faces around him. The mate sat -among a crowd of noisy lads, who were trying to draw him out. - -“Yes,” he said, in continuation of some statement which he was making, -“it’s true. I’m tellin’--” - -“And that’s your name--is it?” asked Billymack. - -“My name’s Wade,” said the mate, “an’ my old ’oman’s name’s Gipson; -and ye’ll not find many of that name in this counthry. No, sir.” - -“But how can your name be Wade, and your old ’oman’s name be Gipson?” - -“How? because my name _is_ Wade, and me old ’oman’s name _is_ -Gipson.” - -“But she’s your wife--ain’t she?” - -“My own wife--married be me brother the praste.” - -“Then she must be Mrs. Wade.” - -“I tell ye her name’s Gipson.” - -“If she’s your wife, she must be named Wade.” - -“I tell ye _me_ name’s Wade, and me old ’oman’s name’s Gipson; an’ -ye’ll not find many o’ that name in this counthry.” - -And so the mate prosed on, unable to see that his wife’s name was the -same as his own. - -And now fresh wood was heaped upon the fire. Some went off and gathered -brush, and the bright, flaring flame burst forth, rising far into the -sky, and throwing a vivid light. Then they all sat round’ it, watching -the flames as they shot up and illuminated the scene, throwing a gleam -of radiance across the water, and lighting up the old schooner as she -lay afloat. - -Then a song was proposed. Captain Corbet opened the proceedings by one -of his own peculiar harmonies, which was received with loud laughter and -cheers. Others then, sang; and finally they called on Bart for “Bingo,” - a favorite song with all. So Bart sang Bingo, and they all joined in the -chorus. - - “A farmer’s dog sat on the floor, - - And his name was little Bingo; - - A farmer’s dog sat on the floor, - - And his name was little Bingo. - - Bart. B! - - Bruce. I!! - - Arthur. Nil! - - Tom. G!!!! - - Omnes. O! O! O! O! O! - - ‘And his name was little Bingo! - - “This farmer he brewed right good ale, - - And called it rare old Stingo; - - This farmer he brewed right good ale, - - And called it rare old-Stingo. - - Bart. S! - - Bruce. T!! - - Arthur. I!!! - - Tom. N !!!! - - Phil. G!!!!! - - Omnes. O! O! O! O! O! - - And called it rare old Stingo! - - Bart. “Now, don’t you call this a merry tale? - - Omnes. We think it is, by jingo! - - Bart. O, don’t you call this a merry tale? - - Omnes. We think it is, by jingo! - - Bart. J! - - Bruce. I!! - - Arthur. - - Tom. - - Omnes. NO! O! O! O! O! - - “We think it is, by jingo!” - -As the last chorus, roared out in tremendous tones, burst into the air -and ceased, it was followed by a sudden roar of thundering laughter -coming from some strange voice from the direction of the wood-pile. In -an instant every one had started to his feet, and looked in amazement -for the cause of the noise. - -There, on the top of the wood-pile, stood a stout, burly, red-faced -man, laughing, and stamping, and clapping his hands. It was a long -time before he could gain breath, to speak. At length he conquered his -laughter, and shaking his fist, he bawled out,-- - -“See here, you young rascals! What do you mean by coming here and -burning up my wood? Hey!” - -At this Mr. Long came forward, and Captain Corbet followed. Mr. Long -introduced himself, explained the situation, apologized, and offered to -pay. - -This the stranger laughingly listened to. - -“Pooh, pooh! Mr. Long. I’m delighted to see you, sir,” he said. “Don’t -apologize for the wood. You’re welcome to all of it. I’m Captain Pratt, -and I want you to come up to my house, and put up there as long as -you like. As for the wood, I’ll give you free liberty to burn it, on -condition that the boys sing that song again.” - -Captain Pratt now advanced among them, and his bluff manner, hearty -laughter, and stentorian voice at once made him a great favorite. He -informed them that he was the owner of the cove and all the region round -about; that he had a sawmill up the stream; that he had a schooner which -was away; and finally he insisted that they all should go at once to -his house, and take up their quarters there for as long a time as they -liked. - -This invitation was unanimously accepted, with thanks from the teachers -and cheers from the boys. So, leaving Captain Corbet and the mate to -extinguish the fire, to prevent danger to the wood-pile, they followed -Captain Pratt through the darkness to his house. - -It was a small-sized farm-house, where Captain Pratt and his wife lived -by themselves. He had three beds, into one of which he proposed to put -Messrs. Simmons and Long, leaving the other beds and a huge kitchen -sofa for the twelve boys. Captain Corbet and the mate could sleep on -the vessel. The boys succeeded in packing themselves away in some -extraordinary fashion or other; and though they would have had far more -real comfort on board of the schooner, yet they preferred this for the -novelty of the thing. - -On the following day, the first care was to secure a supply of -provisions. Captain Pratt had a rude sort of shop, in which he kept -supplies for the mill, but unfortunately the stock was low; but the -schooner was expected every day with fresh stores. All that the shop -contained, at present, was some meal and molasses, with a box of tobacco -and a barrel of pork. Out of these they had to select the ship stores; -and as they had only Hobson’s choice, they laid in some meal, molasses, -and pork. Captain Corbet tried hard to induce them to lay in some -tobacco also, but Mr. Long declined. - -Strolling about the cove, they found it a very pretty place, encircled -by hills which were covered with hard-wood trees. A stream ran from -among the hills into the creek, supplying it with a little fresh water, -which at low tide was the only water in its bed. Going up the stream a -short distance, they came to a very romantic spot, where the stream ran -through a narrow gorge, and tumbled over a small precipice, forming a -miniature cascade of a very charming kind. Here the boys spent a greater -part of the day in fishing, and succeeded, after six hours’ laborious -effort and patient waiting on the part of ten of them, in catching five -very small trout. - -After getting the supplies for the schooner, Messrs. Simmons and Long -went along the shore to a place which Captain Corbet told them of, where -they expected to secure some petrifactions. Captain Corbet went with -them as guide. The mate took possession of the barn, and slept all the -time. - -As for the boys, two of them, Bogud and Billy-mack, went with the -teachers by special invitation, for the others preferred remaining. -Six hours were consumed in fishing, and the remainder of the time in -dawdling. They _did_ Pratt’s Cove so thoroughly that there was not a -nook unexplored. - -On the following night, the “B. O. W. C.” decided to quit Captain -Pratt’s house and sleep in the schooner. So they went down about dusk, -and were put on board by Jiggins, who brought back the boat to the -shore. - -Messrs. Simmons and Long did not return that night, nor yet on the -following morning. About ten o’clock they got back. They were met by -Captain Pratt and the five boys who had slept at his house. They had -very serious faces. - -It seems that Captain Pratt had been down at eight o’clock to call the -boys to breakfast. He found the schooner gone, and on the mud flats, -left dry by the tide, lay the fluke of the anchor broken off short. This -was the message that he brought, explaining, at the same time, that the -boys had slept on board, and must have drifted away with the schooner. - - - - -XII. - -_On the Track again.--Fishing for a Duck.--Asking for Bread, and getting -Stones.--Pat shines as Cook._ - - -AT receiving such startling intelligence, both Messrs’. Simmons and -Long looked horrified and bewildered, and neither of them said one word. - -“At any rate, the mate’s on board,” said Mr. Long at last. - -“The mate! That’s the wrorst of it. He got his breakfast only a half an -hour go. He slept in my barn.” - -“And where has the vessel gone?” cried Mr. Long, in great distress. - -“I can’t tell. I rowed out for a mile, but didn’t see any signs of -her.” - -“We must go after them at once,” said Mr. Long. “Can’t we get a -sail-boat somewhere?” - -“I suppose I can rig up a sail in my boat; but she’s only a punt, and I -don’t think wo could manage her at all among the currents out there.” - -“I wonder if they know anything about sailing?” - -“No doubt they do,” said Captain Pratt. - -“O, they’re all right,” said Captain Corbet, confidently. “I said, when -they went adrift before, that they’d turn up right side up--and up they -turned. Besides, the weather’s fine, and there’s no danger in life.” - -“Still we must do something,” said Mr. Long, anxiously. “Even if they do -understand sailing, they can never get back here again.” - -“It’s jest what I’ve been expectin’,” said Captain Corbet, after a -profound silence, and with a tone of deep conviction. - -“What?” - -“Why, that there anchor.” - -“What did you expect?” - -“Why, that it would break off short. You see there’s been a crack in it -for nigh two years, an’ every time I used it, I said, says I, it’s bound -to go this time.” - -“But why in Heaven’s name did you let it go so long, if it was cracked?” - -“Wal, to tell the truth, I never gave it a thought, ’cept when I had -occasion to anchor,--and then, of course, I couldn’t get it mended.” - -“And so you’ve been trusting your own life, and the lives of other -people, to that old, cracked anchor,” cried Mr. Long, indignantly. - -“Wal, it held on well down thar at Five Islands, and off on the -mud-flats. You know that. It did jest as well as a bran new one, and -didn’t break fair this time, nuther.” - -“Didn’t break fair! What do you mean?” - -“Why, I mean the schooner has kind o’ sot on it when she was aground, -and broke it that way.” - -Mr. Long turned away. - -“Captain Pratt,” said he, “I won’t conceal from you that I’m very -anxious. Those boys may understand sailing, but I’m not sure that they -do. I must do something. Can’t you suggest anything?” - -“Well, I was just going to take my glass,” said Captain Pratt, “and go -down to that there pint,” pointing to a headland a few miles off. “That -pint commands a view of pooty nigh the whole bay, and I shouldn’t wonder -if we’d see the schooner. I was just going there when you came. Besides, -we can get a boat down there,--a good deal better than mine.” - -“We’ll start off at once, then,” said Mr. Long. “These boys can wait -here till We come back. I hope we won’t need to trouble your good nature -long, Captain Pratt.” - -“Trouble! Why, sir, it’s the greatest pleasure I have to see a strange -face here occasionally.” After a few words of warning and good advice to -the boys who were to remain, Mr. Long, together with Mr. Simmons, went -with Captain Pratt, while Captain Corbet, with Bogud and Billymack, -followed after them. The party of six set out in the direction of the -headland mentioned by Captain Pratt, while the five boys who remained -sauntered down slowly to the shore, where were the boxes and baskets -which had been landed there on the evening of the arrival at the cove. - -The boys felt the hours hang heavily upon their hands. The absence of -their companions made them all feel dull; the fare at Captain Pratt’s -had grown distasteful, for pork and Indian meal and molasses are things -that are sometimes not wonderfully attractive to the youthful taste. So -these things palled; and when, at twelve o’clock, they were summoned -to dinner by amiable Mrs. Pratt, she found that they had lost their -appetites--a thing which she attributed to their grief about their lost -companions; and so she set to work to condole with them and comfort -them. After escaping from this kind-hearted old lady, they went down to -the point again, and watched the water as it flowed in. Captain Pratt -and his companions had not comeback, and they were prepared for a long -absence on his part. The thought made them more disconsolate., - -“What can we do?” said Sammy. - -“We’ll starve,” said Johnny Blue. - -“We’ll have to do something,” said Jiggins, who was a very grave, earnest -boy, and always spoke in a very grave, earnest manner. - -“Well, what?” - -“For my part,” said Jiggins, “I’ll go fishing. Who’ll come with me?” - -“I will,” said Muckle. - -“And I,” said Johnny Blue. - -“I don’t think there’s any chance,” said Pat; “so I’ll stay here and -fish for ails in the mud.” - -Pat could never get rid of “a taste of the brogue,” which clung to him, -and proclaimed his nationality. - -Sammy showed no inclination to move; so the three went fishing, leaving -him and Pat behind. - -Pat then went into the woods and cut a long fishing-pole, after which he -went fishing for “ails.” He had no success, but kept at it bravely for -more than an hour, unwilling to give up. At last his patience was worn -out, and he returned to the point. On his arrival there, Sammy was not -to be seen. - -Pat seated himself disconsolately on the shore, and watched the tide, -which was now running out, for some time. Then his roving eyes were -attracted by the baskets and trunks. To these he directed his steps, in -the hope that something might be found there with which he could satisfy -the cravings of his appetite. - -He found most of the trunks empty. Some of the baskets were filled with -plates, others with cups and saucers, others with knives, forks, and -spoons. All these excited his disgust to an unmeasured degree. In one -of them he found a ham-bone, the remainder of their last repast on -the shore. This had nothing on it whatever--a fact which excited such -indignation in Pat that he flung it into the water. - -At last he came to the baskets containing the minerals. Opening these, -he found a large number of parcels inside. Hoping that these would -afford something eatable, he opened one or two of them, but found, to -his unspeakable disgust, that they contained nothing but stones. - -Pat was a very original character, who had drifted, by some -extraordinary chance, into the school. With a very strong desire to get -an “edication,” he had come there and begged Dr. Porter to admit him, -offering to pay his way by working.-Dr. Porter found that the Irish boy -had already learned a good deal, and that he had an exceedingly strong -desire to be taught more. He could read and write well; and so earnest -were his entreaties, that the kind-hearted doctor consented to admit -him. His industry and application soon gained the good will of the -teachers; while his flow of good spirits, his oddities and whims, made -him popular among the boys. In many respects he was intensely ignorant, -and had not been long enough at the school to acquire anything like the -general information which the rest of the boys possessed. At first they -had wondered or laughed at his blunders; but afterward Pat had been -more cautious about expressing his opinions on anything, and thus, -by exhibiting his ignorance less, was supposed to have surmounted it. -Taking him all together, he was a very remarkable boy, and promised, in -time, to surpass many of his companions. - -At present, however, he was far inferior to them all. He had been asked -to go on the trip of the Antelope from a very kindly desire to give him -all the advantages possible. He had not the remotest idea what the real -purpose of the trip was, but supposed it to be a kind of pleasure party. -It is true he saw Messrs. Simmons and Long hammering, rocks; but with -his usual caution about committing himself and exposing his ignorance, -he had not asked anything about it, nor had he looked at their work. -While they were hammering rocks, he was climbing them, or running about -the beach. He had not noticed the baskets, but supposed them to be full -of provisions; nor had he seen Messrs. Simmons and Long in their tender -tare of their specimens after landing on this place. The stones, then, -which Pat discovered, wrapped in paper, were utterly unintelligible -to him, and the sight of them only seemed to cap the climax of the -indignation which was growing in his breast. - -“Well! well well!” he exclaimed, as he looked at each stone on taking it -from the paper. “What’s this? A stone--a muddy stone! By the powers, but -isn’t this like a boy askin’ for bread, and gettin’ a stone.” - -In fact it was no better than a dirty stone in Pat’s eyes. Two very -beautiful specimens of moss agate they were; but it would need grinding -and polishing to bring out these peculiar beauties. As yet they were -concealed. - -Another and another paper was opened. One contained a white stone, like -quartz, enclosing some amethysts; another a piece of sandstone, with -peculiar marks on it, very highly prized by Mr. Simmons. These Pat threw -on the ground with great indignation. Then he took the rest out without -opening them, knowing by the touch and the weight of them what they -were. He had a strong hope that something eatable might yet be in the -bottom of the basket; but at last all was empty, and there was nothing -to eat. - -His indignation could no longer be repressed. He had a vague idea that -some one had done this so as to play a trick on him, and this thought -only heightened his passion. So, without thinking of anything but his -own wrongs, he seized the unoffending stones by handfuls, and angrily -threw them over the bank into the water. Then he sat down gloomily, and -tried to conjecture which of the boys it had been who had wrapped all -those stones in paper for the sake of tricking him. At first his impulse -was to go around among them fiercely and inquire; but at length, from -fear of being laughed at, he decided to say nothing about it, but wait -and see what would turn up. - -He was roused from his reverie by a touch on the shoulder. - -He started hastily, and saw Johnny Blue, looking very mysterious, with -something under his jacket. - -“Hallo! Where, are-the others?” said Pat. “Couldn’t you catch anything?” - -“The others are up the brook, fishing. I caught _something_,” said -Johnny, with a more mysterious look than ever. - -“What is it? What, have you got under your arm?” - -“See,” said Johnny, triumphantly; and lifting his jacket, he displayed, -to Pat’s astonished gaze, the form of a duck. - -“A duck!” cried Pat, with a shout. “Where did you get it?” - -“H-s-s-s-s-h!” said Johnny, warningly. “I caught it.” - -“Caught it?” - -“Yes, with a fish-hook. I trailed the hook, baited with a bit of bread, -and the duck bit--and here he is.” - -“We’ll cook him!” cried Pat. - -“That’s it; but we’d better get away where they won’t see us.” - -“Sure nobody ‘ll see us here, at all, at all.” - -“Won’t they?” - -“Surely no. There’s lots of wood here, an’ I’ll start the fire in a -jiffy. Come along. Hurroo, boys!” - -So Pat and Johnny set the fire going, and then they picked the -duck,---which was previously killed, of course,--and they had him all -ready to lay on the coals, when suddenly, their attention was arrested -by a low, muffled, piteous squeal close by them behind the wood-pile. - -“H-s-s-s-s-h!” said Johnnie. - -“Botheration!” said Pat, hiding the duck under a log of wood. - -“What is it?” said Johnnie. - -“Sure it’s a pig--that’s what it is,” said Pat. - -A rustle was heard now in the bushes, and then Sammy walked out from -behind the wood-pile. His face had a bright expression of satisfaction, -and he, too, had something under his arm. - -“It’s another duck!” said Pat, with a wild laugh. - -“Sammy’s been out fishin’, too,” and he went off into a peal of -laughter. - -“Stop your noise,” said Sammy. “I thought you were somebody else, and -that’s why I had to come through the trees, and behind the wood-pile.” - -“Is it a duck ye’ve got, thin?” asked Pat. “Sure, haven’t we one -oursilves?” - -Sammy said nothing, but drawing his jacket aside, showed the little -white head and twinkling eyes of a pig of very small size--a roaster, in -fact, in excellent condition. - -“It’s a pig ye’ve got. Didn’t I know the squale of it? Didn’t I say it -was? It’s me that knows the voice of a pig. Hurroo, boys! we’re goin’ to -have a banquet, so we are. Where did ye get it, thin, Sammy, jewel?” - -“Don’t talk so loud,” said Sammy, looking cautiously all around. -“They’ll hear you.” - -“It’s mum I’ll be, thin. But where did ye get it, darlin’?” said Pat, in -a soft, coaxing whisper. - -“Up there.” - -“Where? Pratt’s?” - -“No.” - -“Where thin?” - -“O, never mind. It wasn’t near any house. It was in a field. There were -a dozen of them; and I was so hungry I couldn’t help it.” - -“Faith, thin we may as well have the young roaster as the old pork,” - said Pat. “Ye’re well here. We’re in luck this day. See here.” - -And he pulled out the duck and showed it to Sammy. - -“How nicely you’ve picked it and fixed it!” said he. “I wish we could -manage the pig. I don’t know what to do with it.” - -“Many’s the pig I’ve kilt,” said Pat, loftily. - -“Have you then? And will you do this one?” - -“Will I do it? Faith, it’s me that will,” said Pat. “But won’t he -squeal?” - -“Squale is it? Not a squale you’ll hear.” - -On this Sammy handed the pig to Pat, who disappeared with it among the -bushes. No sound was heard; but after a short absence Pat returned in -triumph, having accomplished his object. - -“And now we’ll have two roasts, instead of one.” Driving two forked -sticks into the ground, he made another with a sharp point, and ran it -through the duck and the pig; then he laid the stick with its burden -upon the two forked sticks, and knelt down by the fire. - -“The coals are just right,” said Pat. “I’ll sit here an’ give it a -turrun till I’m tired, an’ thin ye’ll relave me.” So he kept on turning -the spit, and soon a rich aromatic fragrance filled the air. - -“Isn’t there any salt?” asked Pat, after a time. - -“Of course,” said Johnny; “and there’s pepper too. I’ll get the -castors.” - -“Do, thin, and quick too,” said Pat. - -The castors were soon forthcoming, and Pat sprinkled a little salt and -pepper over the roaster and the duck. - -“That’s the way,” said he, “to bring out the full fleevour.” - -At length they were done, and taken off the fire. The plates, knives and -forks, upon which Pat had looked so contemptuously shortly before, were -now brought forth. A pleasant place was found in a secluded spot, and -here they sat down to dine. - -They had scarcely begun when footsteps were heard. Pat went out to -reconnoitre. - -It was Jiggins and Muckle. - -“Have ye caught any fish?” was his first address to them. - -“No,” said they in a discontented tone; “and we’re starving.” - -“Is it starvin’ ye are? Thin will ye just step in here, for we’ve got -the most illegant dinner ye ever sot eyes on.” And saying this he led -them to the little secluded nook, where the table was spread on the -grass. - -At six o’clock they went up to tea, and Mrs. Pratt sympathized deeply -with the poor boys, who had lost their appetites from anxiety. - - - - - -XIII. - -_Adrift.--Skilful Navigators.--Breakers ahead.--A narrow Scratch.--Stuck -in the Mud._ - - -LET us now return to the unfortunate “B. O. W. C.” who had met so -unexpectedly with another adventure. - -On going on board of the schooner, they found the water low; and the -tide had just begun to float her in rising. As they had slept but little -the preceding night, they retired almost immediately, and soon were -buried in a profound slumber. The next morning Phil was awake first. He -went up on deck, and the next instant gave a loud cry. - -“Hallo, boys!” he cried. “Get up! We’re adrift. Hurry up--quick!” - -Awaking instantly at this startling news, they tumbled up on deck -without a moment’s delay; and there, true enough, they found themselves -far out in the bay, adrift, apparently, as Phil had said. - -“This is queer,” said Bruce. “Here’s her anchor down, as usual.” - -The others walked to the bows where Bruce was, and saw the chain hanging -down, just as though she were anchored. - -“We are anchored, sure enough,” said Arthur. - -“No, we’re not; we’re drifting,” said Bart. - -“Look at the land.” - -A look at the land satisfied all that the vessel was actually moving -through the water. - -“Let’s try the anchor. It must be dragging,” said Bart. - -So they all went to work at the windlass, and in course of time found -the anchor raised. As they worked, they found it lighter than they -expected; and when at length they had ended, they ran to the bows. All -was explained. The anchor was broken off short at the fluke. - -“That’s how it happened,” said Bart. “And so we’re in for another -adventure.” - -“What shall we do now?” - -“Sail the vessel, of course,” said Bruce. - -“Where to?” - -“Back to Pratt’s Cove.” - -“And where is that?” - -No one could answer that. Each one looked around carefully, in order to -see if he could find any place which looked like Pratt’s Cove. But there -were two difficulties in the way of any such discovery. In the first -place, they had approached Pratt’s Cove in the dark, and did not know -how it looked; and in the second place, they could not see any spot that -looked like a cove at all. - -All around them was the bay. Before them was the Parrsboro’ shore. -Behind them was Blomidon. On one side, and a little in front, were the -Five Islands about six miles distant; beyond which the waters of the -bay extended, till they faded away into a low, indistinct lino of coast. -They could understand, in a general way, that Pratt’s Cove lay somewhere -in front of them, but they could not guess within twenty miles of the -place. - -“Let’s up sail,” said Tom, “and run up there. It looks like a cove;” and -he pointed to a hollow in the line of hills. - -“O, the hills around Pratt’s Cove are higher than that,” said Bruce. - -“Suppose we sail over and ask O’Rafferty.” - -“Very well. I agree to that,” said Bart. “Bruce, you can steer.” - -“No. You may as well steer,” said Bruce. - -“I don’t particularly care about it,” said Bart. “Don’t any of you -fellows want to?” - -“O, no. We don’t care. You steer, Bart. We’ll hoist the sails.” - -So Bart turned away with rather a blank expression on his face, and -walked slowly to the rudder. The wind was moderate, and the water only -a little ruffled. The other boys, with immense confusion and shouting, -toiled away at the sails one after the other, and at last managed to get -them set. - -“Perhaps we’d better not have the foresail up,” suggested Bart. - -“O, yes. Why not?” said Bruce. “Come, boys--up she rises!” - -And shouting out a sailor’s song which he had once heard, he completed -his work. - -The vessel moved gently through the water, and Bart pointed her head -towards the island which he considered to be O’Rafferty’s. The wind was -fair, and the vessel came around very easily, and then headed away for -the island. - -Now, it happened that, as Bart belonged to a seaport town, and as his -father was a merchant, and as Bart himself had once experienced a sea -fever, and had been almost on the point of running away to sea,--he had, -very naturally, been always regarded among his companions as a great -authority on all matters connected with seamanship. And so, to a certain -extent, he was. He knew all about the rigging of a ship, and understood, -in a general way, the principles on which she sailed. He was also a good -oarsman; but in point of fact, he had never handled a sail-boat in his -life. This was owing to his father’s prudence, who allowed him to go out -rowing whenever he pleased, but never permitted him to have a sail-boat. -And so it happened that Bart knew no more about sailing than any one on -board. - -However, there was no help for it; and he had to take the tiller and -assume the responsibility of the situation. After a time he began to -gain confidence. The wind was moderate, the schooner was going in a -straight course, and O’Rafferty’s Island was full before him. - -They went on for a long time, when at length Bruce exclaimed,-- - -“Well, I don’t see how it is. We’ve been going to O’Rafferty’s for -full half an hour, and we are no nearer. And here we are, with Pinnacle -Island coming between us.” - -“It’s the currents,” said Bart, coolly. “Nobody can sail in this bay, -unless he understands all about them. I’m sure I don’t.” - -“Hadn’t we better bring her about, and stand off on the other tack? We -could then steer so as to make allowance for the current, which seems to -be setting off there.” - -“Here, Bruce, you steer,” said Bart. “I’m tired.” - -“O, well, let’s bring her around first. Port your helm, Bart.” - -Bart tried to obey; but as he turned the helm in exactly the opposite -way, some confusion was the result. - -“Port! I said port!” cried Bruce. - -“O!” said Bart; and seeing that he had made a mistake, he proceeded to -rectify it by turning it starboard. The vessel had turned partly; but as -Bruce had expected it to turn in the opposite direction, he had checked -Bart’s mistake. But Bruce himself knew as little about sailing as Bart, -and so he had swung the sails the wrong way. - -The vessel caught the wind as she came round; and Bart, who had tried to -obey Bruce’s correction, finding that the vessel was all right, and -was doing very well, checked himself, and let her go. Bart now saw that -Bruce had made a mistake, and Bruce suspected that Bart had. But they -said nothing, and the other boys thought that both Bruce and Bart were -first-rate navigators. - -The schooner now held on straight ahead on what Bart supposed to be -the other tack. Bruce and the others were very well satisfied with the -proceedings. - -“I think we’d better come round again, Bart,” said Bruce. - -“Very well,” said Bart, who had been looking forward to this. - -“Port your helm, then,” said Bruce. - -Bart turned the helm a-starboard, as he had done before, while Bruce and -Arthur swung the booms to assist the vessel. She came round that time -all right. - -“Why, Bart! why didn’t you port the helm?” - -“Because I had to put the helm starboard to bring her round. It’s all -right.” - -Bruce looked grave. He felt that he had committed a blunder. After all, -which was port and which was starboard he hardly knew. He concluded -after this to intrust the care of the vessel to one who knew, like Bart, -and felt quite grateful to Bart for his delicacy in not exposing his -ignorance. - -Away went the schooner--faster this time, for the wind had sprung up -fresher. This was what Bart dreaded. But there was no help for it; so -he kept on, with a vague expectation of some disaster. He now headed, as -before, for O’Rafferty’s Island, and watched very anxiously to see how -they were progressing. - -“You’d better head her a little to the north’ard, Bart,” said -Arthur--“hadn’t you? so as to allow for that current.” - -“Very well,” said Bart; and he put the vessel a little closer in the -direction indicated. - -But in doing so, the vessel began to stagger, and the sails began to -flap and rattle, and Bart was filled with consternation. Hastily he -restored the helm to its former position, but without any result. Then -he tried the old manouvre, by means of which he had already turned her -twice. It was of no use. The sails flapped, and the vessel danced, and -Bart was about confessing his complete ignorance of everything, when -suddenly her sails filled again, and to Bart’s amazement and delight -she sailed off away from the island and back on the other tack. - -Bart’s heart was full of thankfulness, but he said not a word. He looked -ahead as coolly as possible, and held the tiller as before. - -“Well, Bart, what are you up to now? Why don’t you head for -O’Rafferty’s?” - -“Can’t,” said Bart, laconically. - -“Why not?” - -“Why, there are tides and currents about those islands enough to sweep -away a line-of-battle ship. I don’t understand them. Didn’t you see what -a scrape I got into just now? I won’t try O’Rafferty’s again in a -hurry; but if any of you fellows choose to try it, I don’t care.” - -“O, no,” said Bruce, “we can’t do it if you can’t, Bart. But where are -you going now?” - -“Well, I don’t know. We must make up our minds. I’m keeping my eye on -the coast; and if I can find any place that looks like Pratt’s Cove, -I’ll run in. The fact is, we must do something, or they’ll be frightened -out of their wits about us.” - -“Pratt’s Cove? But how can we ever find the place?” - -“Perhaps, when we get in a little closer to the land, we may see it.” - -“I’m confident,” said Bart, “that it’s somewhere along this coast; for -it seems to me, as near as I can remember, that this is the coast we -sailed to. Look at the Five Islands. There’s O’Rafferty’s; and there are -the others. You see we came out from this side of O’Rafferty’s, and then -sailed up somewhere along there. I think, when we get nearer, we’ll see -an opening; and perhaps we’ll hit the cove itself.” - -The others seemed impressed by Bart’s words; and as none of them had -anything better to suggest, they said nothing. - -And now the wind blew still more freshly, and Bart looked around with -dismay. On went the schooner; but the long line of coast showed no -opening whatever, and he had no idea what to do to extricate himself -from the position in which he was. What made it worse was the confidence -which all now felt in him.. He felt that the end would come--the moment -when he would stand revealed in his true colors, and lose his prestige -forever. - -More freshly still blew the wind, and the sea around rose higher, -tossing up now into white-capped waves, which every little while dashed -over the bows and scattered their spray about the decks. Yielding to the -wind, the vessel lay over; and on she scudded, dashing through the -water in a style which excited all on board, and intoxicated them with -delight. - -“Hurrah!” cried Bruce. “Boys, isn’t this glorious?” - -“Glorious!” cried the boys; and some of them swung by their hands from -the rigging, and others danced about the deck, shouting as each wave -came splashing over the bows, and roaring with laughter when any one got -a ducking. - -Hurrah! and Hurrah again!--and yet again! Their wild mirth only added -new anguish to the dismay of poor Bart, who found himself now face to -face with an inextricable problem. - -In their last stretch across from the Five Islands, they had drawn near -to the main land, and were now moving nearer and nearer every moment. -What was to be done? It was already time to turn; but where could he -turn, or where would he go when he did turn? or, for that matter, how -could he venture to turn at all? His last experience in turning the -schooner had filled him with despair. What was the meaning of those -kickings, and flappings, and jumpings? What was the reason that she -didn’t mind her rudder at all? And now the wind was stronger, and the -sea was rougher. Could he venture to turn the vessel with such a wind -and such a sea? He felt that he could not. Anything would be better. So -he thought while taking counsel with his own soul. - -And while taking counsel with his own soul, he saw before him the coast -extending invitingly. There was a long line of sand, or of mud,--which -was just as good,--into which he longed to run the vessel. Which would -be best--to run the vessel ashore, or to make the desperate attempt -to turn her again, and set her kicking and plunging? He preferred the -former. Yes, to run her ashore would solve the whole difficulty. He -might be disgraced by it, but he could not help it. He felt that he -was doomed to disgrace, in any event; and it would be better to incur -disgrace on a mud bank, and in safety, than when tossing and drifting -he didn’t know where. His mind, then, was made up; and he kept the -schooner’s head straight towards the shore. - -But as he approached it, he was aware of one very startling fact, and -that was, that the schooner, while going forward, was also drifting -rapidly to leeward. In the course of that sidelong motion, she was -losing way so rapidly, that, instead of striking the mud flats, she -might run upon a very different kind of place; for there, on the lee -bow, was a headland of dark, stern rock, at the base of which the waves -were breaking into foam. In his fixed attention to the mud flats, he -had’ not noticed this till just now, when it was full before him, and -not very far away. Below this headland the mud flats appeared again. - -What could he do? - -All seemed lost; for the headland, and the foaming waves, and the -frowning, jagged rocks were full before him. With a bitter feeling of -despair, and a pang of anguish for the coming fate of the friends who -had given him their trust, and who even now were singing and shouting -in their uproarious glee, he stood for a moment paralyzed, looking with -white lips at his fate. - -Suddenly, and just as all seemed lost, he jerked the helm a-port. The -schooner swung half round. The wind took her astern, and drove her -forward. Her sails flapped and banged about. Then a current seemed to -seize her and carry her on for a score of yards. Suddenly there was a -thump, a grinding noise, and another thump dull and heavy. - -In an instant all was confusion. - -“The rocks! the rocks!” cried all. “She’s struck!” - -Then the schooner was once more swept on, and a wave, striking her -stern, dashed the tiller out of Bart’s hands, and he fell. Springing up, -he seized it again, not knowing how he moved it, or when. At that moment -the sails filled again, the schooner bounded forward, and in a few -minutes it was beyond the headland, and moving on toward the lower mud -flat; and before they knew that they were saved, she drove hard and fast -into the mud, with a shock that knocked them all down.. - -Picking themselves up, they looked around at the shore in bewilderment. -Then they looked at Bart. - -“What’s all this?” they asked. - -“O, nothing,”’ said Bart. “I found we couldn’t do anything, and so I ran -her ashore.” - -“By Jove!” cried Bruce, “that was a pretty narrow scratch we had of it -on those rocks. After this, Bart, I’ll always brag on you. You’ve saved -our lives, Bart. I thought we were gone for it. I never saw anything -done so splendidly.” - -For a moment Bart was silent. Here was a chance for fame. He might avail -himself of the lucky accident, and turn it to his own glory. But the -thought was only a passing one. It was at once dismissed. - -“No, boys,” said he; “the only thing I did was nearly to destroy your -lives. In fact, I don’t know any more about sailing a vessel than any of -you. It’s been a very narrow escape. I was a fool to try it; and I can -only make amends by confessing it. I don’t believe in being a humbug, -and I won’t be one any longer.” - -At first the boys wouldn’t believe him, but after a while he explained -all about it. After this confession, Bart was as much esteemed by his -friends as ever. - - - - -XIV. - -_In Mud and Water.--A Sea Monster.--A terrific Fight.--Wonderful Pluck -of the “B. O. W. C.”--Swallowing a Sculpin.--The Trophy.--Waiting for -Deliverance._ - - -FINDING themselves thus fixed in the mud, they looked around to see the -place at which they had thus unexpectedly arrived. In front of them -was a bank about sixty feet high, which extended for some miles away, -commencing with the rocky headland, and covered with trees on the top; -while beyond this, the country rose into hills. As far as they could -see, there was no opening in the shore to indicate the presence of a -cove or a harbor. From the appearance of the water, it seemed as -though the mud flat extended for miles along the shore. The water was -comparatively smooth, and the headland kept off the wind, so that after -they had lowered the sails, the schooner remained quite still. - -It was now about noon, and they knew that the tide was rising. A wide -space of the mud flat lay still uncovered by the water. Their position -was a safe one as yet, though not at all pleasant on many accounts. - -“The tide’s rising,” said Phil; “isn’t it, Bart?” - -“Yes.” - -“When will it be high tide?” - -“About three.” - -“I wonder if they’ll come after us.” - -“Of course they will.” - -“There doesn’t seem to be much chance of our getting ashore.” - -“Well, it doesn’t make much difference, for we couldn’t do anything if -we did get there.” - -“I say, boys,” said Arthur, “the schooner’s beginning to float again.” - -All stood waiting in silence, and in a few moments they felt a slight -motion. - -“Yes,” said Bruce, “the tide has risen since we struck, and is floating -us in. At high tide we shall be close up under the bank.” - -“And then what shall we do? We must either choose to fasten the vessel -ashore if we can, or float out again and sail for it, or drift.” - -“I don’t think we’ll care about sailing again, particularly as the tide -will be going out, and the night coming on.” - -“My idea is,” said Bruce, “to fasten her to the shore if we can, and -then go along the beach or the bank till we find some people and get -help.” - -“That’s about all we can do,” said Bart. “We can’t think of going -adrift, and none of us can sail the vessel; so, if they don’t come after -us, we had better land, and leave the vessel; or some of us can go for -help, and others stay on board.” - -“I wonder if the vessel is safe here.”. - -“O, safe enough--if a gale don’t spring up in that case she might get -knocked on the bank.” - -“We don’t seem to have been hurt by our knocking up there,” said Arthur. -“There’s no water in the hold.”. - -“O, she’s all right,” said Bruce; “and she’s a gallant, gallant ship, as -the song says.”. - -The vessel was steadily floated nearer and nearer to the shore as the -tide rose, and the boys watched her progress with close attention. At -about three o’clock they could expect to be up to the bank, and then -they would have to find some way to fasten her. - -Suddenly Bart, who had been looking down the shore, pointed to -something, and said,-- - -“Look, look! Do you see that?” - -“What?” - -“Don’t you see a line--running along about a mile away?” - -“What, a thin, dark line? Yes. What of it?” - -“Why, it’s a wier for fish. It shows that people must be living not far -from here. It shows, too, that we can get something to eat at low tide, -even if there are no people. So, hurrah, boys we’re all right yet.” - -“The fact is,” said Bruce, solemnly, “I must confess that I’m starving. -I’ve felt the pangs of hunger for the last two hours, and I can’t stand -it any longer. I’m going to have a regular rummage down below, for I’m -bound to find something.” - -All the rest followed Bruce as he went below, and they began to overhaul -the whole vessel. For some time they found nothing but a beggarly array -of empty boxes, and loud were their murmurs and complaints. - -“If it hadn’t been for that miserable Sammy Ram Ram, we’d have a few -turkeys and chickens here,” said Bruce. “How that fellow and Johnny Blue -managed to get through with them all, I can’t understand.” - -“Pooh! those two fellows did nothing else but stuff from the time they -came on board till they got to Pratt’s Cove. Captain Corbet and the mate -helped them, and so did Pat, too, no doubt. I haven’t any hard feeling -against any of them, but I must say I wouldn’t be sorry if their food -didn’t agree with them.” - -“Hallo! What’s this? Hurrah!” cried Tom, suddenly. - -“What, Tom,--what is it?” - -“See here,” cried Tom, triumphantly. “Arn’t we in luck? Don’t ever fret -again, boys. Here’s a half loaf of bread that I found in the corner. -It’s rather stale, a little too dry, and too hard,--but I think it’s -about the nicest morsel I ever saw. We’ve got our dinner provided for -us, and we needn’t hanker after raw fish from the wiers any more.” - -Tom’s joy was fully shared by all; and the half loaf of hard, stale, -dried-up bread was quickly divided into five pieces, and eagerly -devoured by the famished boys. - -“And now,” said Bruce, “I feel like a giant refreshed. I’ll go on deck -and have another look at the situation. My private opinion is, however, -that if they’re coming after us, they’d better come. The tide’s getting -higher every minute; and if they get here after we’ve fastened her to -the shore, and got her high and dry, they’ll have to wait for twelve -good hours before they can get her to float off again,--not to speak of -spring tides. Do you know, Bart, if this is spring tide?” - -“I don’t know, I’m sure,” said Bart. - -“Well, then, we’ll have to trust to luck, I suppose. At the same time -I’ve a great mind to go ashore and reconnoitre.” - -“I’ll go too,” said Bart. - -“And so will I,” said Arthur. - -“And I,” said Phil. - -“I’ll go too,” said Tom. “But oughtn’t some of us to stay on board?” - -“Stay on board? What for?” - -“O, to watch the vessel.” - -“Why, what good will that do?” - -“She may drift off.” - -“Well, why should any of us want to drift off in her?” - -“I don’t believe there’s any chance of her drifting off while the tide -is rising,” said Bruce; “and if she does drift off, I think we’re all -better out of her than in her. So if one of us goes ashore, we’d all -better go. It’s not more than three feet deep at the bows, and there’s a -sand-spit over there within easy distance.” - -“I wonder if there are any quicksands.” - -“O, we’ll have to run the risk. There are a couple of boat-hooks there, -and two of us can go ahead and try the ground with them. It’s not far to -the spit.” - -“We’ll have to strip and carry our clothes with us,” said Phil. - -“Yes. It would be a great joke if we left our clothes behind, and the -vessel drifted off with them.” - -The boys now proceeded to undress themselves, and prepare to go ashore. -Each one tied up his clothes in a compact bundle. Bruce and Bart took -each a boat-hook, which lay in the schooner; Arthur took a handspike, -and Tom and Phil found a stout stick each. Thus equipped, they prepared -for the journey. - -It was about one o’clock, and the tide would not be high for two hours -yet. In front of them, and between them-and the bank, lay a broad -expanse of mud flats, separating them from the bank by at least a -quarter of a mile of distance. On their right, however, was a place -which gave them a chance of a much better foothold than that which was -offered-by the slippery and treacherous mud. This was a long sand-spit, -which stretched out from the bank, and ran down across the mud flat and -into the water. It approached to within a hundred yards of the schooner, -and afforded not only a good walking-place, but a much nearer chance of -dry land than was possible anywhere else..Running down over the flat, -it rose above it to a height of from twelve to twenty inches, and was -covered with sand, gravel, and round cobblestones. It was to this place -that they intended to go. - -Bruce led the way. Descending carefully over the bows, he dropped into -the water, which he found up to his armpits. The others followed, and -found it deeper for their shorter stature. It was over the shoulders -of Bart and Phil. Bart, however, took his place by Bruce’s side, and -prepared to walk ahead with his pole. Their first object was to get into -shallower water, and so they walked in the direction of the shore until -the water was not above their waists. Then they turned to the right, -toward the sand-spit. - -If it had not been for the bundles, they could have varied their -progress by swimming; but as it was, they had to wade, and feel the -way cautiously, for fear of air-holes and quicksands. The surface mud -beneath their feet was very soft; but they did not sink very deeply, -and with every step they acquired fresh confidence. As they neared the -sand-spit, the bottom grew sensibly harder, and shoaled rapidly, till it -was not much above their knees. At length it became a sandy bottom, and -they walked along more rapidly, no longer feeling their way. - -Suddenly they were startled by a wild shout from Arthur. He had been -walking behind with Phil, and was some distance from the others, when -rapidly, between him and them, darted the form of a large fish, which, -in that shoal water, was as visible as if it were on land. At the cry -which he gave, Bruce and the others turned, and saw Arthur with his -handspike in the air, and the fish floundering and splashing close -beside. For a moment the blood of all of them froze with horror; the -next instant Arthur sprang forward, and dealt a tremendous blow with his -heavy handspike full on the head of the fish. - -The monster splashed and struggled, and moved back into deeper water for -a few feet. - -“Run, run!” cried Arthur. “It’s a shark! Run for your lives!” - -The boys all set off as fast as they could toward the sand-spit, which -now was close by them. - -But the fish was not to be easily escaped. In a few minutes it’s dark -form was beside them, and soon it crossed immediately in front of Bruce -and Bart. Mechanically, and in utter horror, both the boys swung up -their boat-hooks, and dashed them wildly against the dark figure. -Both struck home. There was a fearful splashing and writhing. Bart’s -boat-hook was wrenched from his hand, and the fish darted forward into -shoaler water. - -[Illustration: 0201] - -“Run, boys, run!” shouted Bruce, holding his boathook toward the fish, -and slowly retreating, so as to keep the monster in sight. Away they -went, Phil and Tom first, then Arthur. Bart moved forward, and then, -seeing his pole floating a few feet on one side, made a rush for it and -secured it. Then he kept by Bruce’s side, ready to help him in guarding -the retreat of the others. - -The fish continued to splash and writhe about, either because he was -bewildered by the shoal water, or else because he was suffering from the -wounds which had been inflicted. As he did not pursue, Bruce and Bart -took fresh courage. - -“Let’s finish him, Bruce!” cried Bart. - -“Pitch in, then!” cried Bruce; and rushing at the fish, he drove his -boat-hook point deep into his side, while, at the same time, Bart, -raising his into the air, struck down, so that the hooked part -penetrated and held. - -“Hook him, ‘Bruce!” shouted Bart. “Let’s drag him ashore.” Bruce raised -his pole to do so; but at that instant the struggling, writhing fish -turned towards them with furious energy, and moving over on its side, -it tried to twist Bart’s hook out of its flesh. The water was so shallow -that it could not have full exercise of its strength, and Bart held on. -The fish, in its struggles, opened its gasping mouth, showing wide rows -of sharp, triangular teeth. At that instant Bruce lowered his pole, and -drove it straight into the open mouth; forcing it deep into the throat. -The monster, in its agony, closed its jaws, and held it with a deathlike -tenacity. - -A cry of triumph burst from Bruce and Bart. - -“Hurrah, boys! We’ve got him!” they cried. “Pull, Bruce, nearer the -shore--into shoaler water.” - -The water was already too shoal for the fish, which had so carelessly -thrown himself into it, and his resistance could not prevent the united -energies of Bruce and Bart from dragging him forward a few paces. But -that was all. Rousing himself, the monster tossed, and writhed and -struggled, and lashed the water into foam. Bruce and Bart could no -longer drag him. It was a struggle between them; but the boys had -now got their blood up, and they would have been dragged back to the -schooner rather than loose their hold. - -The fish, in its fury or its agony, still kept its teeth closed on -Bruce’s pole, and strove to wrench it out of his grasp. His tremendous -efforts were prevailing against their united strength, and were -dragging them farther out. Bart’s hook had already been thrown off, and -he was plunging the pointed iron again and again into the fish’s side. - -At this instant Arthur came dashing through the foam. Raising his heavy -handspike in the air, he poised it for a moment so as to take sure -aim, and then, with tremendous force, the weapon descended full on the -monster’s head. It was a crushing blow. The struggles and writhings -ceased, and changed to feeble motions and occasional convulsive -vibrations. It resisted no longer. It was powerless. - -They dragged it upon the dry ground of the sand-spit, and examined their -conquest. - -The fish was about five feet long, very broad at the head and shoulders, -with a very wide mouth, armed with several rows of saw-like teeth. The -nose was rounded, and the jaw was underneath. Its back was a dark slate -color, and its belly white. - -“It’s what we call a Shovel-mouth Shark,” said Bruce, as he looked at -it, and admired its proportions. - -“They call it a Dog Fish with us,” said Bart. - -“It certainly, is a kind of shark,” said Arthur; “and as that sounds -better, we’ll call it by that name. Boys, we’ve fought and killed a -shovel-mouth shark! Let the ‘B. O. W. C.’ remember that!” - -“We must keep his jaws as a trophy,” said Bruce. “Let’s cut him up and -get his jaws. Who’s got a knife?” - -“Here,” said Arthur. - -Thereupon, with the aid of the knife, the fish was dissected. In the -stomach they found a fish quite as remarkable as the one which had -swallowed it. It was a sculpin, a fish whose bony covering, and spiny -back, and horny head, and wonderful voracity, make it seem like those -primeval fish that swam in the waters of the world in an age when all -the inhabitants thereof were formed on a similarly monstrous model. - -“What a fish,” cried Bart, “to swallow a sculpin! He must be a real -shark, after all, for a shark could not beat that. I thought that it -might have been by accident only that he met us, but it seems now as -though he was ravenous enough to mean mischief. ’Pon my word, if -I’d known about that sculpin, I think I would have run away instead of -staying to fight.” - -After examining the fish, the jaws were removed, and, carrying them, -they walked up the sand-spit to the shore. Then dressing themselves, -they sat down and rested for a time. Then Bruce and Bart climbed to the -top of the bank, and went in different directions to explore. On coming -back, each had the same story. They had met with nothing but fir trees -and alder bushes, and had not seen a sign of any house whatever. On this -they all decided to go to the top of the bank, and wait patiently until -the tide was high, then fasten the schooner as well as they could, leave -a message on board to indicate their course, and set off along the coast -in search of inhabitants. With this decision, they climbed the bank to a -conspicuous position, and there waited. - -The tide rose higher and higher. Each increase in the depth of the water -allowed the schooner to approach nearer to the shore, though there was -a sidelong drift, which, from time to time, changed her position, -sometimes presenting her bows to the beach, at other times her side. - -The water was rising higher and still higher. The mud flats extended -close up to the beach below, but the beach itself was formed of sand and -gravel, and rose, by a steep slope, from the mud flat to the base of the -bank. By two o’clock the water had reached the edge of the gravel. - -“It will take an hour more,” said Bruce, “before it gets to high-water -mark. One hour more, boys, and then off we must go to explore the -country.” - - - - -XV. - -_Scratching for Clams.--How not to eat them.--Fearful Consequences of -Folly.--A formidable Medicine Chest.--Prevention better than Cure._ - - -MEANWHILE the people at Pratt’s Cove waited for the return of the -captain and his company. The boys had excited the deepest sympathy of -Mrs. Pratt by their loss of appetite, and she was anxious about the -lost vessel. They had not eaten anything for tea; and after the meal was -over, they walked down to their old place. It was about half past six -o’clock, and a large part of the cove was already uncovered by the -receding tide. - -“I wonder if there’s any duck left,” said Jiggins, with a sigh. - -“Or roaster,” said Muckle, with another sigh. - -“No,” said Pat, mournfully. “Sammy and Johnny have disposed av thim.” - -Sammy and Johnny both looked innocently down, and by their silence -acknowledged the soft impeachment. - -“I’ve a presentiment,” said Jiggins, “that I’m going to be very hungry -before bed time.” - -“1 shouldn’t wonder if some of the rest of us were like you,” said -Muckle. - -“And now,” said Jiggins, in a grave and solemn tone, “what ought we to -do?” - -“We haven’t much time left,” said Muckle, suggestively. - -“Something must be done,” said Jiggins, emphatically. - -“And soon, too,” added Muckle. - -“Deed, thin, an’ why don’t ye go aff an’ do somethin’?” said Pat, -energetically. “Come, now, whatever ye do, I’m yer man. Is it another -duck ye mane?” - -Jiggins shook his head. - -“It would hardly do--” - -“Do--it jist wud, thin.” - -Jiggins shook his head. - -“The fact is, I have my doubts about it. I don’t think it’s altogether -right.” - -“Thin what made ye ate it for?” said Pat. “There wor others that thought -it was all right--they did.” - -“I felt badly while eating it. I felt it was--not--right.” - -“Do ye mane it wasn’t done right?” - -Jiggins shook his head. - -“Well,” said Pat, “if ye didn’t like the duck, how did ye like the pig? -Ye’ll not be findin’ fault with that, I think.” - -Jiggins shook his head. - -“I have my doubts.” - -“O, botheration take your doubts. Why didn’t ye doubt before ye sat -down?” - -Jiggins shook his head. - -“I tell you what,” said Muckle; “I’ve got an idea.” - -“What?” cried all. - -“Clams!” said Muckle. - -“Clams?” said Jiggins. - -“Look,” said Muckle, waving his hand over toward the flats; “do you see -that?” - -“Yes.” - -“Well, it’s full of clams.” - -“Why, of course--of course,” said Jiggins. “Why, so it is. What do you -say, boys?” - -“I say yis,” cried Pat. “Hurroo, boys! if we can’t have a duck, or a -roaster, again, we’ll have clams.” - -“Hand along a basket then, Sammy,” said Jiggins. - -As Sammy gave him one, he said,-- - -“Now, you two, are you coming?” - -“Well--no--we don’t care about it,” said Sammy. - -“Well, you wait here and kindle the fire, and get a pot ready. We’ll -cook them the moment we get back.” - -“All right,” said the two boys. - -Upon this Jiggins, and Muckle, and Pat started off after the clams. -Before leaving the shore, they got some sticks to use for scraping up -the sand, and then directed their steps toward the creek. The creek ran -through the middle of the cove, and on each side of it the wide flats -extended up to the shore. These, toward the lower part of the cove, were -formed of soft mud, but at the upper part they consisted of sand, in -which appeared a multitude of little holes, which are generally called -breathing-holes, about these parts, under the impression that they serve -this purpose for the clams. By digging where these little holes are -seen, the clams may be found buried in the sand and mud. - -Toward the upper place they walked rapidly and eagerly, and looked -anxiously around for the “breathing-holes.” - -“Here,” said Muckle. “There are lots here.” - -Both went toward where he stood. - -“See,” said he, pointing to the sand, which was dotted with little holes -all around the place where they were standing. - -“That,” said Muckle, “is a sure sign.” - -“So it is,” said Jiggins. - -“Well, let’s go in.” - -“An’ is there oysters here, too?” asked Pat. - -“No; only clams.” - -“It’s sorry I am for that same, thin. Oysters are a dale betther.” - -“O, clams ain’t bad,” said Muckle, “when you can’t get oysters. So pitch -in, Jiggins.” - -And Muckle, taking his stick, began to scoop up the sand. - -Jiggins began to do the same; and for some time both worked diligently. - -“Pooh!” said Jiggins, at last. “That stick’s no good.” - -“No good? Why not?” - -“It won’t hold the sand.” - -“Mine does very well.” - -“Well, I might as well have nothing. It’s like trying to eat rice with a -chopstick, Chinese fashion. I’m going to try another plan.” - -“What’s that?” - -“Why, like the hens. I’m going to scratch for my food,” said Jiggins. -“What were fingers made for?” - -And saying this, he began scratching up the sand. - -“Bedad! an’ if you’re the hen, I’ll be the chicken, an’ ate what you -scratch up.” - -“Will you?” asked Jiggins. - -“I will thin.” - -“Whatever I scratch up?” - -“Yes--if they’re clams.” - -“But you’ll have to eat them raw.” - -“Well, sure it’s raw I mane.” - -“Why, man alive, it’ll make you sick.” - -“I’ll risk it. Sick is it? Not a bit of it.” - -“Did you ever eat any raw clams, Pat?” - -“Av coorse. Why not? and raw oysters, too.” - -“Well, you won’t blame me?” - -“Is it blame? Not a bit of it. Niver fare.” - -“O, well, I’ll scratch for you then.” - -“Go ahead, thin.” - -So Jiggins began, and scratched for some time. - -“Here’s your first clam,” said he, throwing out one to Pat. - -Pat opened it, and swallowed it with extraordinary celerity. - -“Doesn’t that look as if I knowed how?” said he, biting off the black -tip of the clam, and throwing it down. “Scratch them along, my boy.” - -“All right; here’s another.” - -“An’ here’s to your very good health, an’ long life to ye,” said Pat, -as he swallowed it. - -“Here’s another--and here--and here--and here, too--and here’s three.” - -“Faith, thin, the more the merrier, and it’s meself that’s glad to see -thim same,” said Pat, as he seized and opened them, one by one, and sent -them flying after the others. - -“How do you feel now?” asked Jiggins, after he had scratched for some -time. - -“Sure I feel better than iver; an’ why not?” - -“All right. Here are some more. Go it, Pat.” - -“Go it it is,” said Pat, seizing the clams with undiminished avidity, -and devouring them. - -“Here’s more, Pat. Don’t blame me if you see the ghost of your -grandmother in your dreams tonight. And here’s more. Don’t blame me if -you have the gripes, and have to stand on your head all night.” - -“Niver you fare for me; but you go on wid yer scratching an’ let me ate -in pace.” - -The clams now came forth fast and furious. Muckle had found a place -filled with them, and had heaped up his basket. Jiggins had a large pile -on the sand, in front of which Pat had taken his station, and was vainly -trying to keep up with Jiggins. But it was impossible, for Jiggins had -found large numbers closely packed together. - -“What’s the matter over there?” said Muckle. “Have you filled your -basket, Jiggins?” - -“Not yet. I’m busy filling Pat,” said Jiggins. “Hallo, Pat, you’re slow -about it.” - -“Niver fare. Slow is it? Thin I’ll be up wid ye before long. On’y give -me time, as the schoolmaster said when they wor examinin’ him on the -alphabet.” - -“All right. But while I’m waiting, I’ll put these in the basket,” said -Jiggins; and he began to fill his basket from the pile. - -“How can I ate them when you’re putting them in the basket?” said Pat. - -“I’ll dig up plenty more--enough to keep you going.” - -But Jiggins was tired; and after digging up some more he found the sand -tinged red. To his amazement he saw that his nails were worn away, and -were now bleeding. His fingers’ ends began to smart with acute pain, and -he was compelled to desist. - -“I think I’ll be off,” said he. “Pat, you may eat from the basket.” - -“From the basket, is it? Not a bit of it,” said Pat; “I’ll only eat from -your scratching.” - -“I’ve scratched the basket full for you, and that’s enough. In fact -it’s too much,” he added, as he felt fresh stings on his finger tips. -“Besides, I’ve my doubts about it.” - -“Yer doubts, is it? and again? An’ what for this time?” - -“Well, you see, I’m afraid it’s not altogether fair to you.” - -“You’re a quare bird, wid yer doubts, an’ that’s all about it,” said -Pat. - -They then went back to the bank, where a bright fire was burning, and -the pot was all ready, with sea-water boiling in it. Into this they -threw the clams; and sitting down around the fire, they waited. - -Pat sat in silence. There was a peculiar expression on his face. He grew -moody and preoccupied. Frequent sighs escaped him. - -“What’s the matter, Pat?” asked Jiggins. - -“O, nothin’.” - -Pat struggled against his secret grief most valiantly, but soon he could -struggle no longer. A deep groan burst from him, and he fell back -doubled up and writhing. His face was deadly pale, and big drops of -perspiration stood on his brow. In his pain he rolled over and over, and -moans and low cries escaped him. - -“It’s the clams!” cried Jiggins. “O, I knew it. I had my doubts about it -all the time.” - -“What can we do?” cried Johnny. - -“We’ll have to get him up to Captain Pratt’s,” said Muckle: - -But for a long time they could do nothing. He writhed and struggled so -that he could not be moved. At last Johnny Blue ran up for Mrs. Pratt. -The good lady came down with a basket full of infallible remedies, and -tended poor Pat for some time. At last he was easier, and they managed -to get him up to the house, and put him in bed. - -Jiggins went back with the others, and finished the clams. All were -silent except Jiggins, who, every little while, would solemnly shake his -head, and slowly ejaculate-- - -“It was _not_ right. No, boys, it was _not_ right. I felt so, for I had -my doubts about it all the time.” - -One thing surprised Mrs. Pratt when she was administering to Pat’s woes -on the bank; and that was, the very savory smell of that clam stew which -was simmering in a pot behind the bushes. She could not understand it, -but concluded that it must be some great delicacy among the vessel’s -stores lying on the bank, which had so very fragrant an odor. Afterward, -when her mind was less preoccupied,--when Pat had been well rubbed, and -poulticed, and blistered, and plied with herb tea, and all those other -medicaments which the “medicine women” of the rural districts love so -well; after all this had been attended to, then she began to think once -more about that fragrant odor. And gradually, as she thought about it, -there arose in her mind a conjecture as to what that odor might have -arisen from; and the conjecture gathered itself inseparably around the -idea of--“clams.” - -To Mrs. Pratt that thought was a momentous one. - -For what did that involve? - -It meant that there was danger abroad,--danger which impended over the -young charges committed to her, and which she must counteract. It meant -that some of them had been eating clams in the month of May--an act -which, in her estimation, might produce consequences which could only be -called terrible. - -In the face of this great possible danger, Mrs. Pratt gathered herself -up, and prepared to meet it boldly. Already all her doctoring instincts -had been roused into full play by the case of Pat, and having begun a -good work, it was not easy to stop abruptly. She had got her hand in, as -the saying is, and she wanted to finish her work. It did not take long -for her to come to the stern conclusion that the work must be fully -completed. - -So she first of all brought forth her little store of medicaments of all -kinds, and ranged them on the kitchen table. They presented a formidable -show. There were,-- - - 1 bottle Mint tea. - - 1 “ Essence of peppermint. - 1 “ Ginger extract. - 1 “ Cayenne pepper extract. - 1 “ Paregoric. - 1 “ Rum and onions. - 1 “ Sulphur and molasses. - 1 “ Sour cream. - 1 “ Eye wash. - 1 “ Pratt’s pain killer.. - 1 “ Hemlock water. - 1 “ Tar water. - 1 “ Poppy juice. - 1 “ Essence of smoko. - 1 “ Brandy and salt. - 1 “ Castor oil. - 1 “ Camomile water. - 1 “ Mineral water. - 1 “ Pratt’s antidote. - 1 “ Hair wash. - 1 “ Ear wash. - 1 “ Toothache drops. - 1 “ Creosote. - 1 “ Rowland’s Macassar oil. - 1 “ Cocoaine. - - 1 bottle Salt and treacle. - 1 “ Antibilions mixture. - 1 “ Arnica. - 1 “ Opodeldoc. - 1 “ Hartshorn. - 1 “ Aromatic vinegar. - 1 “ Sweet oil. - 1 “ Benzine. - 1 “ Grease eradicator. - 1 “ Lye. - 1 “ Tobacco water. - 1 “ Wild honey. - 1 “ Lime juice. - 1 “ Alcohol. - 1 “ Cod liver oil. - 1 “ Neats foot oil. - - In addition to these, she had,-- - - 1 parcel Wormwood. - 1 “ Camomile flowers, - 1 “ Cardamum seeds. - 1 “ Birch bark. - 1 “ Spruce gum. - 1 “ Bosin. - 1 “ Dandelion. - 1 “ Elm bark. - 1 “ Elder berries. - 1 “ Hops. - 1 “ Gum arabic. - 1 “ Catnip. - - 1 parcel Spearmint. - 1 “ Peppermint. - 1 “ Beeswax. - 1 “ Boot ginger. - 1 “ Cloves. - 1 “ Alum. - 1 “ Magnesia. - 1 “ Balm of Giles - 1 “ Horseradish. - 1 “ Flagroot. - 1 “ Sarsaparilla. - 1 “ Sassafras. - 1 “ Soap. - 1 pot Pomatum. - 1 box Lard. - 1 bundle Lint. - 1 parcel Senna. - 1 pot Mucilage. - 1 parcel Salts. - 1 “ Cotton wool. - 1 “ Diachylon. - 1 pot Mustard. - 1 parcel Calomel. - 1 box Blue pills. - 1 “ Cantharides. - 1 “ Garlic. - 1 “ White lead. - -And a great many other things, which had accumulated in her closet, and -which she now brought forth for the especial benefit of the four boys. -Having selected some from among these, she sat calmly awaiting their -return. - -When the boys came back from the bank,--. where they had been enjoying -their clam stew,--. this was the sight that greeted their eyes on -entering the kitchen: a table filled with bottles and vials, another -table filled with parcels and bundles, and on the floor jugs, boxes, -kegs, firkins, and bags, in the midst of all of which sat Mrs. Pratt, -with her eyes gleaming, from behind her spectacles, upon them, and an -expression of benevolent yet unshakable resolution upon her face. - -The boys entered one by one, and took their seats, looking suspiciously -around. There was something in the general appearance of things which -did not altogether satisfy them. - -“Ehem--ehe-e-em!” said Jiggins, at last, to whom the suspense was -becoming intolerable. - -A long silence followed. - -“Ehem!” he remarked again; but Mrs. Pratt made no answer. - -“Ehe-e-em!” he remarked a third time. “Is--ah--is Pat--ah--any better?” - -“Considerable,” said Mrs. Pratt. “Yes, _con_siderable.” - -“That’s right--that’s good. I feel very much relieved. I’ve blamed -myself very much for letting him do as he did.” - -Mrs. Pratt gave a long sigh. - -“What do you mean?” she asked. “You all had clams, as well as he. You -had a clam stew. Why should he suffer more’n you’ns?” - -The boys started, and looked at one another. How in the world had Mrs. -Pratt found out about the clams? They felt uneasy at first, but soon -recollected that, after all, cooking clams was no harm. So they regained -their courage. - -“Why, you see,” said Jiggins, at last, “it was different with Pat. We -had them cooked, but he ate them raw.” - -“And you think that makes any difference,” said Mrs. Pratt, grimly. - -“Why, certainly--of course,” said Jiggins, looking at Mrs. Pratt -anxiously; while all the other boys stared at her in dire anticipation -of some fearful disclosure. - -“Not a mite,” said Mrs. Pratt. “There isn’t a mite of difference between -you,--_all_ of you, mind, and him,--on’y he was kind o’ took bad -at onst, an’ you’re a waitin’. Let me sec. How long is it since you -finished eatin’?” - -“O, only a few minutes,” said Jiggins, nervously. - -“Well, I supposed so. Ye-ry well,” repeated Mrs. Pratt, in the tone of -a cool physician, who feels gratified when a disease takes the form he -suspected, even when it is attended with pain and danger to the patient. -“Yes, that’s it; and now can you remember how long a time it was after -Pat had done eating the raw clams to the fust pain he felt?” - -The boys looked in fearful anxiety at one another, and then all eyes -turned to Jiggins. He turned pale, and all the expression of his face -changed to one dismal blank. - -“Can’t any of you remember?” repeated Mrs. Pratt. “How long was it?” - -“Well--as near as I can remember,” said Jig-gins, in a faltering voice, -“it’s--about--I should think--somewhere near--perhaps--the neighborhood -of half an hour--that is, more or less.” - -“About half an hour. I thought so,” said Mrs. Pratt, remorselessly. - -“Somewhere about that,” said Jiggins. - -“Till he felt his fust pains?” - -“Yes.” - -“Well,” said Mrs. Pratt, with a benevolent smile, “somewhere about half -an hour from this you’ll feel the same.” - -She paused, and watched the effect of this fearful announcement. - -The effect was powerful. Four pale faces looked, with awful eyes, at -her, and at one another. Not a word was spoken in reply. - -“Yes, every one of you. You’ve all eaten, I s’pose.” - -Jiggins nodded mournfully. - -“And plenty, too.” - -Another nod. - -“Very well. You’ll have it hot and heavy, mind I tell you. Pat will be -beginning to feel quite comfortable just as you begin to get took.” - -“But--but,” ‘said Jiggins, rousing himself despairingly, “I -thought--that is, I always heard--that clams were good stewed--and I -never heard that even raw clams were bad, except when you took too many -of them.” - -“Shows how your parients neglected your edication,” said Mrs. Pratt, -loftily. “They didn’t understand the natur’ of the clam, certain. It -isn’t the cooking, or the not cooking, of the clam that makes it so -dangerous; it’s the clam itself--or rather, the clam at this season of -the year. That’s what makes it dangerous.” - -“This season of the year? Why, what’s that got to do with it?” - -“Haven’t you ever heard of that? Dear! dear! dear! An’ yet you go to the -Academy, and don’t know about clams. Dear! dear! dear!” - -“They don’t teach about clams there,” said Jiggins, morosely. - -“So you don’t know the danger there is in eating them now.” - -“No.” - -“Well, I’ll tell you--they’re _pison!_” - -“Poison!” ejaculated the others, in horror at the thrilling whisper in -which Mrs. Pratt hurled this word at them. - -“Yes, _pison!_ Hain’t you ever heerd the old lines, - - ‘In the months without the “R,” - - Clams a deadly pison are’? - -That means May, June, July, and August. Another verse, says, - - ‘In August, May, July, and June, - - All shell fishes lead to ruin.’ - -That means, you see, that in the summer months these things are as bad -as pison.” - -“What shall we do?” cried Jiggins, after a long, despairing silence, in -which these fearful words sank deep into the hearts of all. “What shall -we do?” - -“Well,” said Mrs. Pratt, with a benevolent smile, “you’d ort ter be -thankful that you’ve got me. I am jest the person to treat your case. -I’ve got the medicine all ready. If you take it in time, you may avoid -trouble. As there’s only been a few minutes sence you ate the pison -clams, p’raps you may get off without much pain. I’ve jest got some herb -tea, some drinks of different kinds, some mustard poultices, and two or -three more mixtures for you. I won’t bleed any of you if I can help it. -Only jest give yourselves up to me, and trust to me. But there must be -no delay. I have the mixtures all ready.” - -Saying this, Mrs. Pratt rose like an ogress, and advanced upon the -unhappy boys. Filled with fears of poison, looking upon her as their -only safety, they made no resistance, but swallowed, one by one, the -nauseous mixtures which were given. And still she stood over them, -talking about the danger before them, and forcing upon them more -medicaments. - -Then came the mustard plasters. - -But enough. Let us draw a curtain over the sufferings of the unhappy -four. - - - - -XVI. - -_New Hopes and Plans.--A Sail!--A bitter Disappointment.--A hazardous -Adventure, and a Fright.--Quilts for Togas.--Another tremendous -Casualty._ - - -THERE, on the top of the bank, sat the five boys of the “B. O. W. C.,” - waiting patiently. “Only an hour more, boys,” repeated Bruce. “Well, if -they don’t come, we’ll survive it,” said Bart. - -“I suppose we shall start off at once, if they don’t come.” - -“Yes, as soon as the tide begins to fall.” - -“I wonder if it will carry the schooner with it.” - -“I think that it will.” - -“Perhaps it will leave it aground.” - -“All right. That will be so much the better for us. It would be a pity -to lose the schooner so soon.” - -“O, she won’t be lost.” - -“Yes, she will. What’ll prevent her? She’ll be carried ashore on some -rocks and broken to pieces, or she’ll drift out into the Bay of Fundy.” - -“O, she has other chances in her favor. She may drift on some mud-flat -like this, or she may be picked up on the basin, or, if she does get out -into the Bay of Fundy, she may get picked up there.” - -“That may be; but, after all, it’ll be hard on Corbet; and he’s rather -poor.” - -“It’ll serve him right,” exclaimed Tom Crawford. “He must have known -that his anchor was broken.” - -“Well, it certainly does serve him right, if he knew that; but he’s a -careless fellow, and I dare say he didn’t know anything about it.” - -“I wonder where this coast goes?” asked Phil Kennedy. - -“Well, it goes in two directions,” said Bart. “Which way do you mean?” - -“The right.” - -“O, that goes to Parrsboro’ Village; the left leads up to Pratt’s Cove.” - -“How do you know?” - -“I can’t tell just where Pratt’s Cove is, but I know the direction in -which it must lie from here,” said Bart. “You can tell that by seeing -the way the Five Islands lie toward us. If they come for us, they’ll -have to come from behind that headland.” - -“I wonder if they’ll come by land or water.” - -“I don’t see how they can come by land.” - -“There’s a road, I suppose.” - -“O, ever so far back. How could any one find anything about us on the -road? No; they’ll come by water, so as to find us either afloat or -ashore.” - -“There isn’t any boat at all in Pratt’s Cove.” - -“O, there must be other coves near, where they can get other boats.” - -“It will be hard for us, if they don’t happen to have a boat.” - -“O, they’ll get one.” - -“And meanwhile we must act for ourselves; for I don’t believe they’ll -get one to-day, at any rate.” - -“Yes, we may as well prepare for an expedition along the coast.” - -“Shall we separate, or go together?” - -“O, together, by all means. But, hallo! what’s that?” - -At this exclamation from Bart, all looked where his eyes were turned. - -“A schooner!” they cried; “a schooner! There they come! Hurrah, boys! -we’re all right.” Instantly every one sprang to his feet. “Come, boys, -take off your shirts,” said Bruce, as he pulled off his own. “Let’s get -ready a supply of red bunting to make signals to them.” Instantly all -of them tore off their shirts, and waved them wildly from the top of the -bank. - -Yes, it was a schooner. It had come thus suddenly upon them as they were -talking; and even though they had been on the constant lookout, yet its -appearance had startled them all. It was twice as large as the -Antelope, of a bright green color; its masts were yellow, and its sails -beautifully neat. Spreading its snow-white wings to the breeze, it -came bounding over the waves from behind the headland, and directed its -course in toward the shore. - -“She’s not heading for us at all,” said Bruce. “If she keeps on in that -direction, she’ll be a mile down beyond us before we know it.” - -“She don’t see us,” said Bart. - -“Wave your signals, then! Ah, what a pity we hadn’t a good signal-post!” - -“I’ll climb a tree,” said Phil, looking around. - -“There isn’t any tree fit for the purpose. The highest ones are hidden -by the smaller ones in front. This is as conspicuous a place as we can -find.” - -Meanwhile the schooner kept on at an angle with them, and pursued her -way without taking any notice’ of them, heading toward a point far down -to the right of the place where they were standing. - -With a face of stern determination, and the air of a captain of a -battery, Bart drew his pistol. - -“I’ll fire,” said he, solemnly. - -The next instant, bang! or, rather, pop! went the pistol. - -But the schooner took not the smallest notice even of that overpowering -demonstration. On the contrary, it kept straight on without altering its -course. - -“They’re blind, and deaf, too; and that’s all about it,” cried Phil -Kennedy, in deep disgust. - -“I wonder what’s the matter with them,” said Bruce. “They don’t keep a -very good lookout, or they’d surely see us. There’s red flannel enough -here to be seen five miles off.” - -“I wonder who is steering.” - -“I wonder who those two chaps are in the bow. Can it be Bogud and the -mate?” - -“I wonder who that old boy in a pea-jacket can be? It surely can’t be -Mr. Simmons?” - -“It’s Captain Corbet.” - -“Nonsense! Captain Corbet is steering.” - -“No, that’s the mate.” - -“It isn’t, either. Don’t you see the mate on the bow?” - -“That the mate! That’s Mr. Long.” - -“Bah! Mr. Long don’t generally go in his shirtsleeves.” - -“Why shouldn’t he? I s’pose he is helping the others. He’d just as soon -take off his coat as not, if he had anything to do.” - -“It isn’t Mr. Long, any way.” - -But these wonders and conjectures were now interrupted by a movement on -the part of the schooner. She had already gone beyond the spot where the -boys were standing, and had come to within half a mile of the beach. -She now wore round. Flap went the sails! there was a quick movement -on board, and then away she went on another tack, with her head turned -toward the opposite shore. - -“She’s leaving us!” cried Bruce, aghast. - -For a few moments all stood in silent dismay. This was a thing which -they were not prepared for. If no schooner had come at all, they could -easily have borne up; but now, since one had come, they had not for -a moment doubted their speedy deliverance. There was not hope, but -certainty, in her appearance. But now this was dashed to the ground, and -the reaction was extreme. - -Bart was the first to break the silence. - -“1 tell you what, boys,” he cried, “I don’t believe it was them at all.” - -“O, yes, it was,” said Arthur. “I recognized Captain Corbet.” - -“No; you may depend upon it, you were utterly mistaken. Why, do you -suppose, if they were after us, they would have come and gone so coolly? -There wasn’t the slightest sign of any anxiety, or curiosity about them. -If it had been our friends, they’d have seen our signals soon enough.” - -“Yes, and the Antelope down there nearly ashore.” - -“Well, I don’t know. But I certainly thought I recognized Captain -Corbet.” - -“I thought I saw Bogud.” - -“Not a bit of it. They were strangers, and that accounts for -everything.” - -“And now,” said Tom, “all that we’ve got to do is to wait for a few -minutes more, and then start.” - -“I say, boys,” said Bart, after a fit of musing, “what a pity it is that -we can’t fasten the vessel somehow, and keep her here! There’s an old -tree at the bottom of the bank big enough to moor a ship at. If we could -only get a line around it from the schooner, we could keep the vessel -here till they did come.” - -“Yes, that would be the best plan,” said Bruce; “for I’ve-been thinking -that we may find some people here who would sail the schooner back to -the cove. It would be a great pity to let her drift.” - -“It’s a pity that we can’t get at her,” said Arthur. - -“And why can’t we?” asked Bart. - -Why! The question at once made every one stare and think. Each one could -answer in his own mind why such a thing could not be done, but no one -stated such a reason. All were silent. - -“It’s not very far,” said Bart. - -“No.” - -“Not so far as it was to wade when we landed.” - -“That’s a fact.” - -“And I move that we try, it.” - -“Ah, that’s all very well!” said Phil. “But who _will_ try it?” - -“Well, then, _I_ will,” said Bart. - -“O, then, if it comes to that, I’ll go too,” said Bruce. - -“So will I,” said Arthur. - -“And I,” said Phil. - -“And I’ll be with you, boys,” said Tom. - -“Of course you will,” said Bart.-“But what’s the use of all of us going. -Two of us will be enough. Bruce and I can take our poles and do it. It’s -not much any way.” - -“And I’ll go with my handspike,” said Arthur. “In fact, I don’t think we -need even boat-hooks,” said Bruce. “The bottom is hard sand just there, -all the way out to the vessel. It’s as safe as a floor.” - -“Yes, except for one thing,” said Arthur, holding up the jaw of the -fish. - -“Hm!” said Bruce. “For my part, I don’t believe there’s any danger just -here. It’s too near the bank, I never heard of them coming in so near -high-water mark; but, at the same time, I dare say it will be better to -take the boat-hooks.” - -“O, yes. We’ll feel safer,” said Bart, “and that’s something. One -advantage will be, that we won’t be bothered with our bundles.” - -“How do you propose to do?” asked Bruce. - -“Well, to board her and get a line.” - -“Will any of the lines be strong enough?” - -“Well, my idea is, to let down the chain, fasten the rope to the anchor -stump, and all of us can then drag it ashore. We can then wait till -the tide brings the vessel near enough for us to pass the line, or the -chain, around the tree.” - -“That ought to hold it,” said Arthur. - -“Of course it will.” - -“Very well then. Let’s start. And first of all, let’s strip.” - -“I’ll take the pistol, Bart,” said Phil, as Bart laid it down before -taking off his belt; “and if anything happens, I’ll fire.” - -“All right, my son,” said Bart. - -They all went down then to the beach below, where they stripped, and the -adventurous five went into the water, although only three were going on -board; for Tom and Phil, felt bound in honor to share the possible peril -of the others. - -The water had risen a little up the steep declivity of the pebbled -beach, and the vessel was some distance nearer than she had been when -they first climbed the bank. It was a favorable time for starting, but -not so much so as it would be in the course of half an hour. But they -were too impatient to delay, and so they started. As it was, they had -not more than fifty yards to go. - -The bottom was not muddy just here, but composed of hard’ sand, like -the sand-spit on which they had landed. The water was quite smooth, only -disturbed by a gentle ripple, which, farther out, rose into small waves. -The descent, like that farther out, was but very gradual, and it was -only by almost imperceptible degrees that the water deepened. - -Bruce and Bart went first, with their poles held in their hands in such -a way that they were able to splash the water before them, so that if -there should chance to be any more “shovel-mouth sharks” near by, they -might take notice and govern themselves accordingly. For they firmly -believed that all fish are frightened by any splashing, and deterred, -just as wild animals are frightened and deterred, by the flashing of -flames. - -Tom and Phil followed more slowly, the former armed with a boat-hook, -and the latter with the pistol. The distance was quickly traversed. The -water grew deeper and deeper, until it was up to Bruce’s armpits and -Bart’s shoulders. By that time they touched the schooner’s bows. - -At that instant a splash was heard close by them, and the movement of -some body was felt amid the waters. - -“Up! Quick!” cried Bruce. - -“You go first,” said Bart. - -“I won’t,” cried Bruce. - -“Nor will I,” said Bart. - -Bruce said no more. He stooped down, and clasping Bart in his brawny -arms, he jerked him up out of the water. Bart clambered on board, and -held out his hand to Bruce. Another instant and the latter stood by his -side. Arthur followed at the same time. - -“Did you see that?” asked Arthur. - -“Yes. Did you?” - -“Yes. What was it?” - -“Another shovel-month shark--wasn’t it?” - -“I don’t think so. It wasn’t the same color. It was white.” - -“Perhaps it turned over to bite.” - -Arthur shook his head. - -“‘No. It came between us. It was not so large as that other fellow. It -dashed off at once.” - -“Perhaps it was only a codfish,” said Bart. - -“Well, it was a large one, then. It might have been a porpoise. I wonder -if porpoises come so near the shore.” - -“Sometimes, but not often.” - -“I shouldn’t wonder if it was a sturgeon,” said Arthur. “After all, it -may only have been a codfish. At the same time I’d much rather be here -than down there.” - -“Boys!” shouted Bruce to Tom and Phil. “Boys, you may as well go ashore. -and dress. We’ll stay here a little while. It’ll take some time to get -things ready.” - -At this Tom and Phil went back and dressed. - -The fish which they had last seen had produced a very solemnizing effect -on their minds. There came over them a horror of that treacherous water. -They felt an aversion toward venturing in again, and were sorry that -they had come. But there was no help for it. There they were now, though -each one felt that he could not venture back again into the water -very readily. It might have been a sturgeon, or a porpoise, or even a -codfish; but the horror of its presence was still there, whatever it -was. It was some time before they could rally from the panic which had -filled them as they tumbled on board. And though each said but little -about it, and alluded to it very lightly, yet each one understood pretty -truly the feelings of the others. - -“Come, boys, hurry up!” - -This was the cry that Phil and Tom sent them from the beach. They had -dressed, and were watching them with impatience. - -“We’re going to wait till she gets nearer,” cried Bruce. “At high tide -she will be close to the beach, and we won’t have to drag the chain so -far.” - -“You’d better come now,” said Phil. - -“No,” said Bart; “the chain won’t reach so far.” - -“All right,” said Tom. “We’ll go up the bank again till you’re ready.” - -Saying this, the two boys clambered up the bank, when they rambled a -little into the woods. Arthur and Bart then found a line, one end of -which they fastened, to the anchor. It was their intention to take -the line ashore, and let go the whole chain, which they hoped could -be pulled to the beach as far as the tree. Before that could be done, -however, it would be necessary for the schooner to be much nearer. The -water was already rising, and there yet remained many feet to be covered -before the tide would reach what they considered as high-water mark. - -“I don’t believe it will be high tide for an hour yet. It will be an -hour later than we calculated,” said Bruce. “Hang it, it’s too cold -here. I wish we had our clothes.” - -“Well, I’m not going to freeze any longer,” said Bart, jumping down -into the hold. He was absent for a few minutes, and soon returned with -a quilt gracefully wrapped around him like a Roman toga. With a laugh, -Arthur and Bruce jumped down, and imitated his example. Then coming -on deck again, they joined Bart, and the boys professed to be very -comfortable, considering all things. - -They now took their seats at the stem, and looked out to sea, watching -for any signs of relief. This occupied them for a longer time than they -thought. - -“I wonder what’s become of Tom and Phil,” said Arthur, suddenly jumping -up and looking toward the shore. - -The others did the same. - -Scarcely had they done so, when a cry of dismay burst from them. - -The shore was at least five hundred yards away. Phil and Tom were -scrambling down the bank, gesticulating wildly. - -“What’s all this?” cried Arthur. - -For a moment no one answered; but at last Bart said, in a voice -tremulous with agitation,-- - -“We’ve mistaken the high-water mark altogether, boys. It must have been -high tide when we came on board. We’ve been drifting off ever since.” - -“Couldn’t we wade ashore?” said Arthur. - -Bruce seized a boat-hook, and plunged it over the vessel’s side into the -water. - -“Couldn’t do it,” he said, slowly. “There are eight or nine feet of -water.” - -“Can’t we swim?” - -“Will you try it?” - -Each one looked at the other, but there was no assent to this. It was -not the mere distance, but the other perils of the deep that deterred -them, and more than all, the remembrance of their last panic. - - - - -XVII. - -_On the briny Deep, and on the muddy Shore.--The Fisherman’s -Boat.--Reappearance of old Friends.--Remonstrances, Explanations, and -Confessions._ - - -MEANWHILE,--even while they were speaking,--every moment drew them -farther away from the shore. They saw Tom and Phil standing on the -beach, which they had reached by this time, and waving their hands -with frantic gesticulations. They heard them, shout, “Come back! You’re -adrift!” and other words not intelligible. They shouted back again to -encourage them, though they, themselves had but little hope. - -“We haven’t any anchor, boys,” said Bart; “but let’s put down what we -have. It may hold, or, at least, prevent our drifting so fast.” - -“Well, there’s nothing else to be done,” said Bruce; “so I suppose we -may as well try it. Come along, boys. We must do what we can.” - -Saying this, he led the way to the windlass, and the remnant of the -anchor was let go. - -They waited a little while to see what effect this would have, but in a -few moments saw that very-little was produced. - -“No go,” said Bruce. “Suppose we give her the whole chain.” - -“Yes,” said Bart. “It may hold her if it is all out.” - -“At any rate,” said Arthur, “it will prevent her drifting somewhat.” - -“Down she goes, then,” said Bruce, as the chain ran out. Soon it was out -at its fullest extent, and they again watched to see what effect would -be produced. By this time they had gone very much farther from the -shore, and Tom and Phil were just discernible. - -“It checks her a little,” said Bart, “yet very little. As to holding -her, that is out of the question.” - -“And yet there can’t be much of a current here.” - -“I don’t know as to that. It is difficult to tell anything about it. -There are currents in all sorts of places around the bay.” - -“Perhaps, if we let it drag for a while,” said Bruce, “it may catch -somewhere and hold. I’ve heard, of such things.” - -“There’s very little chance, I’m afraid,” said Bart, in a despondent -tone. “If we only had half a fluke I wouldn’t care; but as it is, we -have no fluke at all, and that’s why we can’t do anything.” - -Waiting thus, and wondering what they could do next, the three boys -looked sadly toward the receding shore. The quilts which they had thrown -around them had been fastened at the waist with rope-yarns, and -these, in the exercise of letting go the anchor, had fallen from their -shoulders, leaving them exposed from their waists upward. They looked -ruefully at one another as they thought of this, burst out laughing, and -then drew the quilts, toga fashion, over their shoulders again. - -“It was bad enough this morning,” said Arthur, at last, “but it was a -joke to this. What can we do for something to eat?” - -“There’s not a morsel on board.” - -“The last mouthful of bread we ate before we waded ashore.” - -“If we only had a fish-hook we might hope to catch something.” - -“Fish-hook! Why, man, we haven’t any kind of bait.” - -“Well, all we’ve got to do is to hope for some one to pick us up.” - -“Is that all? No,” said Bart. “I, for one, am not going to sit down -and float away, goodness knows where. I move that we up sail and go -somewhere.” - -“Up sail!” - -“Of course. Why not?” - -“But can we--can you--?” - -“O, we can scrape along. I’d rather have a small accident than drift -off in this style, doing nothing. You all understand my knowledge of -sailing, for you’ve had a fair specimen of it, and if you’re willing -to risk my steering again, I’m ready to take hold; if not, then you -or Bruce take hold, and I’ll keep at the sails. It don’t make any -difference, though, which of us is captain, for I suppose one knows just -as much as another. But, at any rate, I’m bound to have the sails up.” - -“So am I,” cried Bruce, “whatever happens.” - -“And I too!” cried Arthur. - -“Bart, you be captain, old fellow. We won’t take your office from you. -You’ve had more experience than we have had, at any rate, for you’ve -steered her already. But we must get up the piece of an anchor first.” - -“Of course we must, and the sooner the better.” - -Upon this they all went to work at the windlass. It was hard work, but -after some time it was successfully accomplished. By this time they had -drifted out several miles, and the beach still lay before them, but it -was faint in the distance. The headland was then somewhat toward the -right, and this served as an excellent guide. The vessel’s head was -still turned toward the shore, in the way in which she had drifted out. - -“My idea,” said Bart, “is, that we sail straight back again.” - -“It’s a pity we hadn’t the other fellows on board,” said Bruce, “for we -might try some place where there might be houses.” - -“Well, in that case, I’d give you the helm,” said Bart. “As long as I’m -here, I will only go where I know my ground. I don’t care to try the -Five Islands again, nor would I like to turn the schooner. It’s lucky -for us that she’s heading in shore. So come, boys, let’s hurry up with -the sails, or else she may turn off in some other direction; and then -how we can get her round again, will be more than I can say.” - -Hoisting the sails was arduous work, but they succeeded. The wind had -moderated, and the vessel glided slowly back toward the beach. Bart was -so anxious to rejoin Tom and Phil, that he did not venture to try any -experiments in sailing, but simply kept the schooner’s head toward the -place where he supposed they might be standing. The wind was favorable, -the vessel drew nearer and nearer, and at last the beach again became -distinctly visible. - -A shout of joy escaped them as they recognized Phil and Tom again. - -“I wonder how they felt when they saw us drifting,” said Bruce. - -“They must have given us up for lost.” - -“1 wonder whether they expected that we would raise the sails.” - -“I don’t believe they thought of that.” - -“That’s not surprising, after all; especially as we didn’t think of it -ourselves till the last moment.” - -“That’s odd, too. It seems now as though it ought to have been the very -first thing to think of.” - -“Well, the fact is, we had such a tough time this morning off that -headland,” said Bart, pointing to the dark rocks which were full before -them on their right, “that it’s no wonder if we gave up all ideas of -ever hoisting sail again. However, it’s all right. And now what ought we -to do?” - -“There’s only one thing that we can do.” - -“What’s that?” - -“What? Why, what else can we do but run ashore, just as we did -before.” - -“I suppose we can’t do anything else; but it’s a pity, too. Still we -must take Tom and Phil. Though, if they were on board, we could at least -find a better part of the coast. This is so remote, and I haven’t seen -any houses near the place at all.” - -Bad as it was, there was no help for it; and so Bart had to keep the -schooner straight on. On account of the currents, however, and the -loss of way, the Antelope could not come within a mile of her former -landing-place. Phil and Tom saw this, and ran down the beach, carrying -the bundles; and just as they came opposite to their companions, the -Antelope grounded about a hundred feet from the beach. Without waiting -another instant, Phil and Tom threw off their clothes, and waded out. -They got on board without any adventures, and celebrated the restoration -of their companions by dancing like wild creatures about the deck. Long -explanations followed from both sides, after which they discussed their -future prospects. - -“Hallo!” said Arthur, as the schooner sank a little on one side. “She’s -aground. No farther drifting till next tide. And now what can we do, or -where can we fasten her?” - -“We’ll have to try and use the chain and line, as we did before.”. - -“I wonder if we are not too far out.” - -“No; I think not,” said Phil. - -“There’s a good stump up there to fasten a line to,” said Tom. - -“I dare say we can get a line up. If not, we can bury the anchor in the -mud, and put stones over it.” - -“And what can we do about exploring the country?” - -“Some of us must stay by the schooner to attend to the fastenings.” - -“Two can stay, and three go.” - -“No, three had better stay, and two go. It’s too hard work.” - -“Pooh! two will be enough. But who will they be?” - -“Well, we must toss up for it. That’s the only plan. We must do it at -once. There’s no time to lose.” - -“Suppose, before we do anything more,” said Bart, “that we all slip -ashore and put our clothes on. For my part, I’m chilly; and though I -could easily get some more quilts, yet it seems unnecessary to do so -when I have my own clothes so near. Besides, here are Phil and Tom, -whose teeth are already chattering.” - -A loud laugh followed; after which they all sprang, one after the other, -into the water, and hurried to the shore. There they dressed themselves; -and as the vessel was fairly aground, with the tide rapidly going out -past her, they threw themselves on the beach, and prepared to decide on -the ones that would stay behind. - -“There!” cried Phil, suddenly springing to his feet. “I knew it was!” - -“What? what?” exclaimed all the others. - -“A sail!--out there by the headland!” - -“So it is,” said Bart. “Phil, you’ve got a good pair of eyes in your -head.” - -“It’s a sail-boat,” said Bruce. - -“And heading this way,” said Bart. - -“Hurrah!” cried Tom. “They’ve come for us at last.” - -“Come, now, boys,” said Arthur, “don’t let us get excited again. I tell -you that boat is some fisherman, and it is passing by here. Those on -board won’t see us, and there’s no use doing anything. Let’s sit down -and finish the toss-up, and send Phil to the top of the bank to watch, -and make what signals he can.” - -“Not a bit of it!” cried Bart; and springing forward, he dashed into the -water toward the schooner with his clothes on. The water had fallen so -far, however, that he did not get wet much above his knees. Clambering -on board, he lowered the flag of the “B. O. W. C.,”--which had waved -there through all their vicissitudes,--and tearing off his red flannel -shirt, he fastened it close beneath the flag. Then he pulled it up -and then kept lowering and hoisting, with the utmost rapidity, the -extraordinary signal. Nor was this all. He had not yet lost confidence -in his pistol, in spite of its signal failure in the case of the -schooner some time before, but drew it forth now with a certain solemn -decision. By this time all the others had come on board, and were waving -all sorts of quilts and blankets from the stern. In the midst of all -this agitation Bart fired his pistol. The smart pop! rang out bravely -enough; but as the sail-boat was at least three miles away, it cannot be -said to have produced any very extraordinary result. Bart, however, -was satisfied. He had already given charge of the “ensign” to Tom, and, -standing on the starboard quarter, he fired again. After this he rested -for a while, and waited for the boat to come nearer. - -Nearer she was certainly coming, in spite of the scepticism of Arthur. -To guard against the pain of disappointment, Arthur was trying, with all -his might, not to hope, and to prevent any of the others from hoping. -Yet he could not help being as sanguine as the others, in spite of his -efforts. - -“Boys,” he cried, “be careful now. Remember this boat don’t see us, and -don’t intend to. She’s a fishing-boat, out after sturgeon. She’s sailing -straight across, past us, to--Hurrah! here she comes straight down to -us.” - -“Ha, ha, ha! Hurrah! She sees us! Up and down with the flag, Tom! Fire -away, Bart! Bring up that fog-horn, somebody, and blow till you burst. -I’ll content myself with a sociable yell.” - -Whereupon a yell, so loud, so harsh, so penetrating, burst forth from -Bruce, that it seemed to penetrate even to the boat. White signals -certainly were waving from those on board, and a tall figure in black -stood upright in the bows waving a hat. - -“Ha, ha!” cried Bart, as he fired his pistol again, and danced joyously -about. “And you call that a fishing-boat, do you, Arthur? So you -think the fishermen here go out to throw their nets, dressed in black -broadcloth and silk hats, do you? Well, I call that good. A fisherman! -Who would think of Mr. Long being taken for a fisherman!” - -All was now the wildest joy. There was no more doubt, and no longer any -mistakes. The boat saw them, and had returned answer to their signals. -It was bearing swiftly down toward them. It was filled with people. Who -were they all? - -The question was soon answered. Nearer came the boat, and nearer, and -still-nearer. At last it came close up, and grounded under the vessel’s -quarter. Mr. Long was first on board, wringing all the boys’ hands, and -pretending to scold them. After him came Mr. Simmons, then Bogud, then -Billymack, then the two captains. Hearty was the greeting, and deep and -fervent the joy, at finding that all had turned out so well. The “B. O. -W. C.” had to tell all about their adventures. They concealed nothing -whatever. Bart related, with the utmost frankness, the story of his -navigation experiments, interrupted by the laughter of the other boys, -and the criticisms of Captain Corbet, who would insist on explaining -what ought to have been done. Then followed the story of the -“shovel-mouth shark,” which produced an immense sensation. Captain -Corbet shook his head solemnly at the sight of the jaws, which Phil had -run ashore to get. But their last adventure, when they were drifted away -from their clothes, was considered about the most singular of all. - -“But how did you manage to find us?” asked Bart, as he ended his story. - -Mr. Long related all about his first discovery of their accident up to -the time that he had left with his party for the “pint.” - -“When we got there,” continued he, “we saw a schooner sailing, and made -it out with the glass to be the Antelope. We watched you as you sailed -toward the Five Islands. You must have been on your second tack then. -We could not imagine where you were going. Captain Corbet thought you -didn’t know your way. I thought you were letting the vessel go wherever -the wind might take you. As it happens, I was not very far wrong. - -“At last we saw you turn, and the performance of the schooner showed -us all very plainly that you couldn’t sail her. It filled us with -the deepest anxiety. We could have got a boat, but your course was so -strange, that we delayed until we could see where you might finally -bring up. We didn’t expect any accident exactly, but hoped that you -would come nearer. At last you sailed so close to that headland that we -thought you were lost. Immediately afterward you passed behind it from -sight. We waited some time to see if you would reappear, but you did -not. So we at once put off in the boat which belonged to a fisherman who -lived near, and came here as fast as possible. The last time that you -drifted off we saw you; but perhaps you were too excited to see us--or -perhaps we were too far off to be seen very easily. - -“And now,” concluded Mr. Long, “I’ve found you again, and it’s my fixed -determination not to let any of you go out of my sight. You’re all a set -of Jonahs. The only comfort is, that you come out all right at last.” - -“I’m sure, Mr. Long,” remonstrated Bart, “you oughtn’t to blame us. It -wasn’t our fault. I’d much rather not drift away if I could help it. I -don’t enjoy going about in the fog, or among these tides. I’m sure Bruce -don’t. Neither does Arthur, nor Tom, nor Phil.” - -“Blame you? Of course I don’t blame you,” said Mr. Long. “How can I? It -wasn’t your fault, of course. I only mean that your fortunes have been -very peculiar. I don’t know but, if I believed in omens, I’d say that -your black flag up there has brought us all this run of bad luck. But -come, we’ve been thoughtful about you. We knew you’d be starving, and so -we brought along with us something for you to eat.” - -“Starving! Mr. Long, we’re in that condition that we could eat -horseshoes.” - -With a good-natured laugh, Mr. Long turned away, and jumping into the -boat, handed up the eatables that he had brought for them.. - - - - -XVIII. - -_Wanderings about the Beach.--Science and Sport.--Back Home.--Frightful -Tale of Poison.--A Visit to the Afflicted._ - - -THE eatables which Mr. Long had brought with him were not such as would -have been welcome to a fastidious taste or a dainty appetite; but to -these long-fasting, hard-working, and half-starving, and altogether -ravenous boys, anything that was eatable was precious. The brown -ship-bread and salt pork, which Mr. Long handed up to them, were seized -as eagerly as if they had been roast beef and plum pudding, and soon -disposed of. A knife drawn from Phil’s belt served very quickly to -cut the pork into slices, after which the pork and the brown biscuit -vanished. - -“What a pity,” said Mr. Long, as he looked around, “that we didn’t -get here an hour earlier! The water’s going out fast; the schooner is -aground, and we’ll have to wait till the next tide before we can start -for the cove.” - -“It’s a pity that we can’t do something while waiting, so as not to -throw our time away,” said Mr. Simmons. - -“There don’t seem to be much prospect of doing anything just here, but -we can try.” - -“Nor do I see that there are any people living about here.” - -“No: Captain Corbet told me there were no inhabitants within eight -miles.” - -“These banks are not very inviting to a mineralogist--are they?” said -Mr. Simmons, with a sigh, as he looked along the beach. - -“No; we’ll have to lay out our strength on the mud flats. Perhaps we may -find some interesting footprints at low tide.” - -“Well, we may as well go ashore now, I suppose. It’s rather monotonous -standing here on an inclined plane, with the vessel aground on her side. -I think I’ll climb the bank, and take a general view of the country.” - -“Very well; I’ll go with you,” said Mr. Long. “And now, boys,” he -continued, “remember this: don’t go out of sight. This beach is long, -and it will soon be wide, for the tide will leave it all uncovered. -This will give space enough for even such extensive and wide-spreading -desires as yours. Now, don’t go off the beach or the flats. Don’t go up -in the woods, and get lost; don’t go into the water, and get drowned; -don’t blow yourselves up with that pistol; don’t get into any more -fights with ‘shovel-mouth sharks,’ or, if you do, be sure to call me; -don’t get into air-holes if you can help it. As to going adrift again, I -don’t see how you can manage that, as there is nothing afloat just yet; -but, dear hoys, if you can possibly help it, don’t do it. Try and see if -you can’t manage’ to keep your clothes on. It’s much better, as a -general thing, to do so.” - -All this the hoys greeted with loud laughter; after which they sprang -over the vessel’s side, and scattered themselves along the beach. - -Captain Corbet stood looking after them, with a beaming smile -irradiating his venerable countenance. - -“Yes,” he ejaculated, standing near Mr. Long. “Yes, sir; I allus knowed -it, an’ I allus said it, that them there boys would turn up all right. -Lor’ bless your heart, you can’t wreck ’em, an’ you can’t drown ’em. -The fish doesn’t swim that can tetch ’em. They’re allus bound to turn -up all straight. That’s the confidin’ belief that reigned in my boosom, -an’ sustained me when we watched, ’em in the Antelope, up there at the -pint. As to that there anchor, ef it had been a bran new one, it would -have been broken off jest the same, for that there schooner was bound to -lie on it an’ crack it, an’ them there boys was bound to have that there -adventoor.” - -Mr. Long now landed with Mr. Simmons, and went up to the top of the -bank, where they sat down for some time, gazing upon the wide-spread -scenery of the Basin of Minas. After this they descended and walked -about the beach. At first, they hoped to obtain some shells; but nothing -of the kind could be found. In fact, there were scarcely any pebbles; -indeed, none but the most common kind. For all the waters of the Bay of -Fundy and its adjacent harbors are singularly bare of the more delicate -shell-fish. Lobsters abound, and so do clams; so also do many kinds of -seaweed; but as for the more exquisite forms of sea life, such as we -love to put in the aquarium, they must be sought for elsewhere. Here -are swift currents, fierce rapids, strong tides, vast mud flats or sand -flats, rivers that empty and fill themselves with every ebb and flood; -and it is not amid such scenes that we may look for those graceful, yet -fragile creatures,-whose abode is amid stiller scenes. - -As the tide went down, Messrs. Simmons and Long walked over the flats, -hoping to find something which would reward their trouble. From the -surface of the sea bottom thus uncovered, many interesting things might -be obtained. On these mud flats are found many marks, which are the -counterparts of others that have been turned into stone, and buried in -the adjacent earth. Here may be seen the patter of rain-drops, and the -footprints of birds or beasts made on the very day of their discovery, -while among the strata of the neighboring shore there may lie traces of -a similar kind made many ages ago, which thus have been graven on the -rock, and treasured up for our eyes. - -The boys dispersed themselves everywhere, extending their wanderings as -the tide left more and more of the shore exposed. Far down they could -see the weirs, placed there by the fishermen, and they waited long for -these to become uncovered, so that they might visit them, and inspect -their contents. But it grew later and later, and finally it became too -dark to do anything. Then the voice of Mr. Long was heard summoning them -to the shore. - -Thus the remainder of the day passed without anything to reward them -except the general excitement which had been produced among them. It -would be many hours yet before they could get afloat, and they amused -themselves by making fires at the foot of the bank. A modest and frugal -repast of brown biscuit and pork, washed down with cold water, concluded -the day. For some time longer they sat round the fire, until, at last, -excessive weariness overcame them. Then they went on board the schooner, -and retired to bed. - -Some time after midnight the Antelope was afloat again. None of her -passengers waked. She moved away from the shore without accident. -Morning came, and she had not yet reached her destination. The wind had -been unfavorable, and she had lost that tide. As she could not anchor, -Captain Corbet had run her ashore. They had to wait patiently, and get -off at midday, with the rising tide; after which they resumed their -voyage, and in three hours more they were in Captain Pratt’s house. - -Of the five boys who had been left behind, one was not visible, and the -other four met them with pale, woe-begone faces. They showed no joy at -seeing the return of the wanderers; no curiosity to learn what they had -been doing; and even the sight of the jaw of the “shovel-mouth shark” - produced upon them no effect whatever. - -It was seen that something had happened, and the unhappy four were -closely cross-questioned. At first they refused to answer. At last, on -being pressed, they confessed that they had all been poisoned. - -“Poisoned!” cried Bart, in horror. “How was that?” - -“_Clams!!!_” said Jiggins. - -“Yes, clams!” said all the others. - -“Clams?” cried Bart. “What rubbish! How could clams poison you! Pooh!” - -“Ah, you don’t know,” said Jiggins. “You ask Mrs. Pratt. Haven’t you -heard the old saying,” he continued, with an air of peculiar solemnity; -“the old saying, that they have about these shores:” - - “’ In the months without the “R,” - - Clams and oysters poison are?’” - -“Never heard it,” said Bart; “and I don’t believe it. I’ve eaten lots of -oysters in May myself.” - -Jiggins shook his head. - -“Never do it again,” said he. - -“Do you mean to say that it was clams that upset you so?” - -“Clams, and clams alone,” said Jiggins. “We owe our lives to Mrs. Pratt. -She’s been a mother to us.” - -“Why! What do you mean?” - -“You see we had a stew. Pat ate them raw, and fell down in horrible -agonies. The torments which he suffered were so excruciating that he had -to be carried to the house, and went nearly mad with pain. Mrs. Pratt -attended him, and as soon as he was easier she took us in hand. We had -eaten after Pat, and our pains had not yet begun. Mrs. Pratt got out all -her medicines, and tried them on us one after the other.” - -“What! not all! not _all_ her medicines!” - -“Yes, _all!_” said Jiggins, in a dismal voice. “I can’t tell you all -that we took; but first there was opodeldoc, then ginger, then Crabb’s -cordial, then magnesia, then paregoric, then blue pills, then a mustard -plaster, after which there was rum and onions, brimstone and molasses--” - -“Stop, stop!” cried Bart. “What’s all that? You don’t mean to say that -you took all that?” - -“Yes, _all!_” ejaculated. Jiggins, his face growing at once longer and -paler at the recollection of hiss sorrows. - -“And you’re alive yet--all of you? Then you need never be afraid of -poisons. Yes my poor Jiggins, you have been poisoned; that’s a fact, -though not by clams.” - -Mr. Long, who was present, had listened to all this in consternation. - -“And where’s Pat?” he asked. That young gentleman’s name was Michael, -but everybody called him Pat, and so did Mr. Long. “And where’s Pat?” - -“In bed yet, sir.” - -“Poor Pat! Has he been dosed, too?” - -“Yes, sir; but he was taken worse than any of us;” and with this Jiggins -went on to tell all about Pat and the raw clams. - -“Dear, dear, dear!” cried Mr. Long. “He must have eaten a bushel, and -all raw. Dear, dear, dear! What did he think he was made of? O, how is -it possible for me to keep you all out of mischief? I go after one half -of you who are in peril, and come back to find the rest of you half -poisoned. But poor Pat--where is he? I must see him, for we have to -start for home to-night.” - -“I’ll show you, sir,” said Jiggins; and he took him to the room where -Pat was. He was lying in bed, looking pale and exhausted. He greeted Mr. -Long with a faint smile, and the kind-hearted teacher did his utmost to -soothe the afflicted boy. - - - - -XIX. - -_Complaints of a disappointed Savant.--The humble Confession of Pat.--A -buried Treasure, and a great Search after it by Torchlight’._ - - -“PAT,” said Mr. Long, kindly, “do you think you will be able to start -to-night?” - -“To-night, sir?” said Pat, dolefully. “Yes, the recess is over. Our time -is up, and we must all be back to-morrow. We ought to have been there -Saturday night. Do you think you can come?” - -“I suppose I’ll have to, sir.” - -“If you’re too weak, or if it pains you to walk, we can carry you down, -you know.” - -“What time are ye afther lavin’ at, sir?” - -“About one o’clock.” - -“O, thin, surely I’ll be betther by that time,” said Pat. “I’ll get a -wink of sleep, and wake up meself again.”. - -“Do so, Pat. Is there anything I could get you?” - -“No, sir, thank ye kindly. I don’t know of anything.” - -Yes, they had to go back, for their time was up; yet Mr. Long was in -despair, not knowing what to do about the minerals. He was confident -that they were somewhere--but where? No one knew, and he couldn’t -imagine. - -“It’s too bad,” he cried, as his indignation grew irrepressible. “It’s -too bad. Our expedition has been ill organized. I don’t blame anybody, -but we’ve certainly had very bad luck. With only a week we have wasted -or lost every day but one. Last Monday we were kept all day and all -night at the wharf.” - -“Wal, Mr. Long,” said Captain Corbet, “I s’pose you’re kind o’ blamin’ -me; but what could I do? Ef a man has a babby, mustn’t he nuss it?” - -“No, he musn’t,” said Mr. Long; “he must make his wife attend to -household matters, and keep his engagements.” - -Captain Corbet stared with a look of horror and astonishment at Mr. -Long. - -“Wal, sir,” he said, with modest firmness, “in my humble opinion, sir, -a babby is a babby, an’ flesh an’ blood is flesh an’ blood; an’ I -don’t care who says they ain’t. Ef you’d see that there babby, sir,” - he continued, warming up in a glow of fond parental feeling,--“ef you’d -a-seen that there babby, as I’ve seen him,--a crowin’, an’ a pullin’ of -my har, an’ a sayin’, Ga-ga-ga,--‘you’d-- - -“Mr. Simmons,” said Mr. Long, suddenly, “have you hunted for the -stones?” - -“O, yes, everywhere.” - -“And did you find nothing?” - -“Nothing.” - -“There it is,” resumed Mr. Long. “A whole week worse than lost. We lost -Monday. We started Tuesday, and sailed nearly all day. We had about -two hours’ work, and then the boat went adrift. All Wednesday wo were -wandering about the bay. Thursday came, and we didn’t find the boys till -the day was well gone, and then stopping at O’Rafferty’s and coming here -took up the remainder of the time.” - -“Well, we had Friday to ourselves,” said Mr. Simmons, with a pleasant -smile. He was an amiable man, and always looked on the bright side of -things. - -“Yes, we had,” said Mr. Long, “but unfortunately we accomplished -nothing. We had a long journey, and came back empty-handed.” - -“At any rate, we had the time.” - -“But that time was lost.” - -“O, well,” said Mr. Simmons, “it was one of those days which everybody -must expect to have. We tried hard, but were unsuccessful. I don’t, -by any means, call such a day lost. We gave ourselves up thoroughly to -science.” - -“Well, call it a well-spent day,” said Mr. Long, “and what of it? We -will count it in; but after that--what? Saturday came, and we had to go -after the boys again; now our time’s up, and to-night we must go back -again. We have had a week; and out of it we have been able to spend, at -the very utmost, only one day and two hours. Well. I don’t know how it -strikes you, but I call it hard.” - -“It would, indeed, have been hard if things had turned out as we -feared,” said Mr. Simmons. - -“O, of course I feel all that. I am only lamenting that these accidents -should have happened, and that, when we came for a certain purpose, we -should have been unable to carry it out. And see how things have gone -on. We are out of provisions, and have to lay in a stock of meal, and -molasses, and pork.” - -“I’m sure, meal makes very good food,” said Mr. Simmons. “Hot corn-cake -is rather a delicacy, and molasses is very good to eat with it.” - -“After all, I don’t care anything about these things,” continued Mr. -Long. “What I do care about is the loss of the minerals.” - -“O, they’re not lost.” - -“Yes, they are. No one knows anything about them. No one has seen them. -No one can find them. They’re lost, Mr. Simmons, beyond the possibility -of redemption.” - -“O, I hope not.” - -“Well, I’m going to make a final search. Captain Pratt has asked every -man, woman, and child in the place, but no one knows anything about -them.. I’m now going to question every one over again. I’ve asked -Captain Corbet already. He knows nothing. Captain Corbet, where’s the -mate?” - -“Sound asleep in the barn, sir.” - -“Then I’ll go out and ask him.” - -Captain Corbet went out with him, and after much trouble they roused -the sleeper, who, however, could tell them nothing whatever about the -stones. - -Then Mr. Long asked all the boys in succession. He had asked them once -before, but he was determined to try it again. There was no result. No. -one knew anything about it. At last, all had been examined but Pat. Mr. -Long felt sorry for him, and would have left him untroubled; but his -intense desire to investigate thoroughly was too strong, and’ so he -resolved to ask him. - -Pat was trying to get some sleep, and with very little success. Mr. Long -asked him kindly about his feelings, and spoke cheerfully to him for a -few moments. At length he asked him,-- - -“Pat, I had two baskets of specimens, and they’ve been lost. Do you know -anything about them?” - -“Two baskets of what, sir?” - -“Specimens.” - -“Spicimins, sir?” - -“Yes.” - -“What are spicimins, sir?” - -“Why, mineralogical specimens. Minerals, you know.” - -“Minerals? Sorra a one o’ me knows what that same is,’ sir. I never saw -one in my life.” - -“Never saw a mineral? Nonsense! What we were gathering on the island--” - -“Gatherin’? Was it minerals, then?” said Pat. “Is it anythin’ like -o’--like shrimps, sir?” - -Mr. Long laughed. He knew Pat’s wonderful ignorance about some things, -but he was hardly prepared for this. As for Pat, the poor fellow found -he had made a mistake, and colored violently from shame and vexation. - -“Do you really mean to say that you don’t know what minerals are?” asked -Mr. Long. - -“Sorra a bit of it thin, sir.” - -“Well, they look like little stones. Didn’t you see us breaking little -pieces from the rocks?” - -“I didn’t notice, sir.” - -“That’s no way to do, Pat. You ought to keep your eyes open, or you’ll -never learn anything.” - -“Yes, sir.” - -“Well, then, these minerals looked like common little stones. They were -in two baskets. Each one was carefully wrapped in paper. Now those two -baskets of stones are missing, and I can’t find out anything about them. -I want you to try and remember if you’ve seen anything of that kind, or -if you’ve seen any little bits of paper that may have been around them. -Do you understand? Little stones, you know.” - -And Mr. Long smiled encouragingly, so to give Pat a chance to collect -his thoughts. - -“Little stones?” faltered Pat, as there flashed over him an awful -suspicion that he had done an irreparable mischief to somebody, and to -Mr. Long in particular. “Little stones, sir?” - -“Yes, Pat, little stones. Dirty little stones. You might have seen them, -and would suppose that many of them were worthless, unless they were -wrapped in paper and carefully packed.” - -“Dirty little stones, sir?” said Pat, in an imbecile way. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Long. - -“And aich one wrapped in paper, sir?” said Pat, whose voice died away -into a mournful wail, while he cast an imploring glance at Mr. Long. - -“Yes..Tell me,” cried Mr. Long, “have you seen them?” - -“I have, sir,” said Pat, dolefully. - -“When? where? Where are they now? Where did you put them?” - -“I--I--” He hesitated. - -“Quick! It’s late. I want to get them. You brought them to the house, I -suppose; or did you put them on board of the vessel?” - -“I--I--” - -“Well, why don’t you tell me what you did with them?” - -“O, sir, it’s heart-broken I am this minute, sir! It’s fairly dead wid -grafe I am, sir! You’ll niver forgive me! an’ I’m afraid to tell you, -sir.” - -“What? What’s all this? What have you been doing? What is it?” said Mr. -Long, sternly. - -“No, sir, I thought it was a trick, sir, that the boys played on me, -sir; and I pitched them over the mud into the bank, sir.” - -“You what!” cried Mr. Long, in an awful voice. Hereupon Pat, with many -sighs and tears, and entreaties for pardon, told him all. Mr. Long heard -him through without a word. Then he asked minutely about the spot where -they had been thrown. After this he rushed from the house down to -the point. The tide was down below that place, leaving the mud flat -uncovered. The sun was just setting. Mr. Long stared wildly about. - -There was not a trace of a Single specimen; for the heavy stones had -sunk in, and the soft ooze and slimy mud, closing over them, had shut -them from sight. - -Mr. Long looked around in despair. He had hoped that he might recover -some of them, but was not prepared to see all traces of them obliterated -so completely. Besides, to add to his disappointment, the sun set before -he had begun anything like a search; and the shadows of evening came -on rapidly. What was he to do? Could he thus give up the results of his -expedition, and consent to lose those precious specimens for which he -had done so much? The thought was intolerable. He would go back and -interrogate Pat afresh. It was possible that Pat had directed him to -the wrong place. It was scarcely possible that every stone could have -vanished so completely, if this were really the place where Pat had -thrown them. - -Such were Mr. Long’s thoughts and hopes, under the stimulus of which he -at length retreated from the bank and returned to the house. Thus far -he had kept Pat’s performance a secret, out of consideration for Pat -himself; for he was not willing that so glaring a case of dense and -utter ignorance should be made public. But now he was compelled to tell -it to all of them, so as to get their assistance in the search; so, -after once more questioning Pat, and getting from him fresh particulars -about the place where he had thrown the stones, and finding, to his -dismay, that it was no other than the very place where he had been, he -went to summon the rest’ of the boys. - -Gathering them together, Mr. Long began to unfold to them the fate of -the long sought for, but still missing, stones. As he began, his native -generosity made him desirous of sparing poor Pat; but as he proceeded, -the sense of his own wrongs overcame the dictates of generosity. He -concealed nothing, he kept back nothing, he palliated nothing. All was -made known. Finally, he implored the assistance of every one of them in -finding the lost treasures. - -Of course, after such an appeal, there was no chance for refusal; and so -they at once prepared to follow him. Bart insisted on procuring -torches, and his inventive genius readily suggested an excellent mode -of obtaining light. This was by stripping the inflammable bark from the -huge piles of birch firewood that lay near the house; and folding these -up in compact scroll-like sticks. A large number of these were made; and -with these, with lanterns, and with pine knots, the whole band followed -Mr. Long to the bank. Here they took off their shoes and stockings, and -prepared for their task. - -The mud on the surface was very soft to the depth of several inches, -and into this they sank; but sinking thus far, they found a hard clay -bottom. Proceeding in this way, they all sought with earnest scrutiny -for signs of the buried stones. For some time nothing could be found. -At last, with a cry of delight, Bogud plunged his hand into the mud, and -drew out something, with which he instantly hurried to Mr. Long. - -“Here’s one of them!” said he. - -He held out a lump, at which Mr. Long and all the rest eagerly looked. -It seemed more like a small lump of mud or clay than anything else. - -So they all said. - -“Pooh!” said they; “a little lump of clay.” - -“It’s not clay,” said Bogud; “it’s the amethyst. I know it by the way -it feels. It’s covered with mud, though, and ought to be washed -immediately.” - -Saying this, he rubbed the clinging mud with his fingers, disclosing at -last something with an oval surface and a dirty-gray color. - -“It’s the amethyst,” repeated Bogud, triumphantly. “I know it by the -oval back. I picked the amethyst myself. Wait till I get the rest of the -mud off. See here!--but--what--hallo!” - -His confident tones ceased, and changed to an exclamation of doubt, then -disgust. The boys had crowded around to see the exhumed treasure, and to -catch the secret of Bogud’s luck. As he held it forth and wiped off the -last lump of mud that adhered to its edge, it stood revealed to all. - -“A clam! a clam! a clam!” was the instantaneous shout, followed by a -peal of laughter. - -In fact, so it proved. It was a clam-shell filled with mud which Bogud -had drawn forth so triumphantly. - -After this they sought for some time longer. It was a striking scene. -The boys without shoes, with their trousers drawn up above the knee, -with their torches flashing through the shades of evening, as they -were waved overhead, with the flakes which fell every instant from the -torches into the mud, with their laughter, and noise, and jesting,--all -formed a scene in the highest degree wild and picturesque. - -But the search was useless. Perhaps the finding of the clam disheartened -them; perhaps it was really not possible to find what they sought. -At any rate, after half an hour, even Mr. Long himself despaired, and -called off all the boys to return to the house.’ - - - - -XX. - -_How to waken a Sleeper.--Off Home.--A weary Way.--Baffled like the -Flying Dutchman.--Corbet pines for his Bobby.--“The Wind at last! -Hurrah!”_ - - -AT midnight the whole party left Captain Pratt’s, in order to make -preparations for embarking in the Antelope, as soon as the tide would -serve. Pat had regained very much of his former strength and spirits; -the pain had, in a great measure, left him, and the reaction from his -misery exhibited itself in occasional peals of wild laughter, which -broke very strangely upon the silence of the night. He was quite able to -walk down, and joked with the other boys about his mishap. Trouble -had been anticipated in getting him down to the vessel; but the -anticipations, which had proved baseless in regard to him, were more -than realized in the case of the mate. This worthy had spent almost all -the time in sleeping on Captain Pratt’s haymow; and now, when the time -had come for departure, it was found absolutely impossible to rouse him. -At ten o’clock, Captain Corbet had called him, but with no result. -Then he had used other modes of rousing him, which had all ended in a -failure. Mr. Long had exerted himself, and with a like result. As a -last resort, he had commissioned the hoys to do what they could toward -rousing the slumberer. They very willingly undertook the commission. -Ranging themselves round him, they kept up a prolonged shake at his -shoulder, his head, and his feet. By this means they succeeded in -rousing him so far that he would utter words in a dreary way in answer -to their cries. - -“Get up! Get up!” - -“Ye-e-e-e-e-e-s,” was the reply, ending in a long snore. - -“Get up! Hi, hi, hi!” - -“In--a--mi--i--i--n’t.” - -“Hallo! Up! Get up! The schooner’s off!” - -“Hey?” - -“The schooner’s off!” - -“Hm-m-m--” - -“Here! No sleeping! Get up! You shan’t sleep any more! Get up!” and amid -loud cries and yells the recumbent form was shaken from head to foot. -The mate gaped, and yawned, and blinked, and opened his eyes with a -glassy, dreamy stare, dazzled by a candle-light, which flickered in his -face, and confused by the uproar. He was like a bat suddenly plunging -into a lighted parlor full of noisy children--out of the midst of a dark -night. Only he wasn’t quite so much awake as a bat might be. - -“My--name’s--Wade,” he ejaculated at last, in a slow and solemn tone. - -“Hi, hi, hi! Yah, yah, yah! Hi, yah! h-o-o-o-o! Get up!”’ - -“My ole ’oman’s name’s Gipson,” continued the mate, in a dreamy voice, -as though amid his dreams he was still following out the one train of -thought which seemed to engross his mind during his waking hours. - -“Ya, ya, ya, ya! Get up! Get up! Hal-l-o-o-o-o-o! Bow-avoav-wow! -Ba-a-a-a-a!” and with yells and shouts like these, with cock-crows, with -all the cries of a crowded barn-yard, the boys returned to their effort -at rousing him. - -“An’ ye’ll not find many of that name in this country!” said the mate, -with a tone, to which he seemed struggling to give a sleepy emphasis. - -Up rose the barn-yard cries again, mingled with yells, shrieks, -bellowings, cat-calls, hoots, and roars. - -“Come, come,” cried Bart, shaking his head violently. “Won’t you get -up?” - -“No, sir!” said the mate; but whether if referred to his dream, or was -intended as a reply to Bart, did not very clearly appear. The boys began -to despair, and at length, after further endeavors, they were compelled -to give up. They accordingly returned to Mr. Long, and informed him of -their utter failure. - -Mr. Long’s eyes glared wildly. - -“Very well!” said he, sternly, and with a dark frown. “Ve-e-ry well! I’ll -see if I can’t wake him this time. I’ve been humbugged long enough; and -if words are of no use, I’ll have to try what virtue there is in cold -water.” - -Saying this, he seized a pail, filled it at the well, and strode to the -barn, followed by all the boys. Reaching the place, he advanced to the -mate, and mercilessly emptied the entire contents full upon his head. - -That succeeded. - -With a gasp, a splutter, and a shriek, the mate started to his feet, -looking wildly around as he tried to regain the breath which Mr. Long -had so rudely driven out of him. - -“What--what--what--why, what--d’ye--mean?” - -“I mean this,” cried Mr. Long, “that you’re wanted on board, and if you -don’t go, I’ll empty the whole well on you.” - -The mate looked at him half fearfully, half reproachfully, and then, -shaking the water out of his dripping locks, he slowly wended his way to -the vessel. - -At last all were on board; the baskets and boxes were in the hold, the -lines were cast off, the sails were hoisted, and the Antelope dropped -down the stream. Messrs. Simmons and Long retired, but most of the boys -remained on deck for some time, singing, and laughing, and joking with -each one about the peculiar mishaps which he might have incurred during -the last eventful week. At length all retired, and silence reigned over -the schooner and over the deep. - -Early in the morning all were up. The sea, far and wide, was as smooth -as glass, except where long lines, and occasional ripples, showed the -meeting of opposing currents. Above, the sky was cloudless, the sun was -bright, and in the air not a breath of wind was stirring. Upon this Mr. -Long looked with extreme impatience, frowning darkly upon land, sea, -and sky. The schooner’s sails were flapping idly, her head was pointed -toward the Five Islands, and Captain Corbet was standing listlessly at -the helm. - -“Captain, what’s all this?” asked Mr. Long. - -“The schooner is heading toward the Five Islands. Are we going back?” - -“No, sir. The schooner’s not particular just now whar she heads.” - -“Why don’t you steer for Grand Pré?” - -“Jest what I’d like to do, if she’d let me.” - -“Let you?” - -“Yes. There ain’t a mite o’ wind, an’ she’s, goin’ every which way.” - -“Then we’re standing still, and doing nothing.” - -“Standin’ still?” cried Captain Corbet. “Lor’ bless you, a couple of -hours ago we were ten miles up there;” and he pointed far away toward -the other end of the bay. - -“Up there?” - -“Yes. We’re not standin’ still; not by no manner o’ means.” - -“What are we doing?” - -“Driftin’.” - -“Drifting?” - -“Yes; goin’ ahead like a race-horse--head fust, tail fust, sideways, end -on, and every kind o’ way that a floatin’ craft kin move.” - -“Where are we drifting to?” - -“Down to Blomidon.” - -“Blomidon!” cried Mr. Long, aghast. - -“Yes; an’ farther too. It’ll be lucky if we don’t find ourselves out in -the Bay of Fundy before long.” - -“But can’t you _do_ something? Can’t you sail for some harbor?” - -“Jest what I’m a pinin’ to do, on’y I can’t come it, nohow. Ef I had -a steam tug-boat I’d clap a line on board her, an’ get into a place of -refooge; but bein’ as there isn’t any, we’ve got to drift.” - -“Why don’t you anchor?” - -“Anchor?” cried Captain Corbet, in surprise. “Why, the anchor’s broke.” - -“Well, well,” said Mr. Long, in bitter vexation, “haven’t you got -something--no sweeps?” - -“Not a sweep, as I’m a livin’ Corbet.” - -It was too true. There was no wind, and they were drifting at the mercy -of the tide. The vessel went every way, heading in no direction. -They had no anchor, and they could not sail into the shore. They were -completely helpless. By this time they had all hoped to be near their -destination; but it seemed, from appearances, that they were farther -away than ever. - -What brought their situation home most forcibly to all, was the solemn -fact that their provision was now limited to Indian meal and molasses, -with a little salt pork. If Solomon had only been on board, it would -not have been so bad, for the genius of the venerable cook would have -evolved even out of such unpromising materials as these a wonderful -variety of palatable dishes. But Solomon was far away, and the cooking -was intrusted to the clumsy hands of the mate. His attempts were so -deplorable that the boys were permitted to make experiments of their own -in the lofty art of cookery. The consequence was, that they spent the -whole morning in the cabin, and used up most of the molasses in making -candy, which, though very badly burned, was still more agreeable than -the burned paste of Indian meal which the mate laid before them as a -breakfast. - -The hours of the morning passed, and neither anger, nor impatience, nor -hunger could have any effect upon the relentless tides. The schooner -calmly and placidly went drifting on, past Blomidon, past Cape Split; -and they would assuredly have drifted out into the Bay of Fundy, had -they not, very fortunately, encountered a side current, which bore them -into a bay by Spencer’s Island. There they remained embayed till the -turn of tide, and then they were borne out again, and up the channel, on -the way back into the Basin of Minas. - -They were so near the shore that Mr. Long deliberated seriously about -landing, going on foot to Parrsboro’ village, and trying to get a -row-boat to take them to Cornwallis, or taking the steamer to Windsor, -or doing something else equally desperate. But Captain Corbet assured -him that the steamer would not come for two days, and that he would be -utterly unable to get any men to row him so far. So he was compelled to -stay by the schooner. - -Captain Corbet bore all this with admirable equanimity, looking with a -mild concern at the impatience of Mr. Long, and regarding the boys with -the indulgent smile of a superior being. Leaving the tiller to take care -of itself, he mingled with them, and conversed freely with all. They -drifted far up into the Basin of Minas, and looked forward to nothing -better than a return to Blomidon and Cape Split, with, perhaps, an -excursion in the Bay of Fundy. - -So the day passed, and night came. On the following morning they found -themselves still in the Basin of Minas, not far from the Five Islands, -and drifting toward Blomidon. - -“Wal,” said Captain Corbet, “I’ve been a-thinkin’ that this here is just -like the Flyin’ Dutchman. You’ve heerd tell of him; course. They say -he’s a-sailin’ an’ a-beatin’ round the Cape of Good Hope, but can’t -never get round, nohow. That’s jest the pecooliarity of our position. -Here we are, almost in sight of home, you may say, an’ still we have to -go a-driftin’ an’ a-driftin’, an’ I shouldn’t wonder if we’ll get out -into the Bay of Fundy to-day. If that happens, it wouldn’t be a wonder -if we were blown off to Bosting.” - -“Captain,” said Mr. Long, “I can’t stand this. I must get ashore. If we -get near to Blomidon again, I’ll take Bruce Rawdon, and go ashore in -the boat. I _must_ go, for it’s a matter of the highest importance. Of -course, it’s different with you. You wouldn’t care if you drifted here -till doomsday.” - -At this Captain Corbet thrust both hands deep into his trousers’ -pockets, and regarded Mr. Long with a fixed gaze. - -“_Me?_” said he, in a mild and almost parental tone. “_Me_ not care? -_me!_ Look here, Mr. Long. Do you know what I am? I’m a parient! Your -books call you home, sir; but what is it that’s a-callin’ o’ me? My -babby, sir! That there tender infant has twined hisself round my boosom; -an’ what am I a-doin’? You don’t know, sir; but I’m a-yearnin’ an’ -a-pinin’ for my babby. He’s the most wonderful babby that I ever see,” - continued the captain, in a faltering voice. “He’s got the pootiest -crow; and if you’d jest hear him say his ga, ga, ga--” - -“O, bother your confounded baby!” said Mr. Long, with brutal rudeness, -turning away abruptly. - -Captain Corbet looked after him with a puzzled expression. At first, -indignant surprise seemed to predominate, and those who stood near -anticipated an outburst of long-restrained feeling. But it was only for -a moment. Then Captain Corbet’s better angel came to his assistance. -Indignation vanished, and the face that was turned toward Mr. Long had -on it nothing but a meek, sad smile. - -Captain Corbet shook his head. - -“Thar, that’s it; allus the same,” said he; “on-sympathetic, hard as -a milestone, an’ owdacious in opposition to the tender babe. Human -natur’,” he continued, elevating his patriarchal head, and regarding -Mr. Long’s back with a severe dignity,--“human natur’ might exult in a -administerin’ of a rebewk to sich langedge; but I’ve learned a better -lesson. Yes, boys. I’ve sot at the feet of my babby. The aged Corbet -has received insterruction from a mild infant. Now, I regard all that,” - waving his hand toward Mr. Long, “not with anger, not with re-perroach, -no, but with kimpassion. I pity him. I feel sorry for him. To him is -unknown the holiest feeling of the hewman boosum; sich as _I_ feel, sich -as every feyther feels when he’s a-nussin’ of his _peressh_us babby.” - - - - -XXI - -_Blomidon, insulted, avenges himself.--A Victim devotes himself to -appease his Wrath.--Original Views of Captain Corbet with regard to the -Archaeology and the Science of Navigation._ - - -THE schooner went on drifting, and drew near to Blomidon again. The -giant cliff frowned darkly overhead, its sides all scarred and riven by -the tempests of centuries, its base worn by the fierce tides that never -cease to sweep to and fro. Standing as it does, it forms one of the -sublimest objects in nature. Other cliffs are far higher, and every way -more stupendous; but Blomidon is so peculiar by its shape, its position, -and its surroundings, that it stands monarch of the scene, and rises -always with a certain regal majesty, seldom appearing without its diadem -of clouds. All around are low lands, wide meadows, and quiet valleys, -and the far spreading sea, into which this rugged height is boldly -projected, terminating an abrupt rocky wall. From the shores, for many -and many a mile around, wherever the eye may wander over the scenery, it -rests upon this as the centre of the view. - -“Blomidon,” said Bart, “looks more magnificently than ever, and we have -an excellent chance for a close inspection.” - -“I confess,” said Bruce, “that I would rather not have so good a chance -just now. I’d rather be near the mud flats of Cornwallis than this -majestic cliff.” - -“It’s my opinion,” said Phil, “that Blomidon is taking it out of us.” - -“How?” - -“How? Why, because we slighted him. We started with the intention of -landing here, and instead of doing so we’ve been almost everywhere but -here. So now he has got us, and he will keep us.” - -“Well, if we only had something to eat, I wouldn’t care.” - -“I can’t eat pork.” - -“And I always hated Indian meal.” - -“.And I’m getting tired of molasses candy.” - -“Besides, I don’t believe that it’s healthy.” - -“And then, you know, it’s always burnt.” - -“But it certainly takes away one’s appetite.” - -“Yes, that’s a consideration. What would become of us if our appetites -were left?” - -As they spoke, Mr. Long drew near. They were within a stone’s throw of -the cliff, and were drifting slowly by. He looked up at the summit, -as it. towered far above him, and then ran his eye along the black, -tempest-torn sides. - -“Boys,” said he, with a smile, “you’re right. Blomidon feels his -majesty to be slighted. He’s avenging himself on us. He’ll keep us here -till he gets a victim, or at least till some apology is made. Now, I’m -going to appease his sullen majesty.” - -“How’s that, sir?” - -“By offering up a victim. And who do you think it will be? It will -be--myself.” - -“You, sir!” - -“Yes. I’m going to land.” - -“To land!” - -“Yes. One of you can take me ashore, and leave me. I know the place well -enough, and will walk to the nearest village. I can get a horse easily -enough, and be home before sundown.” - -“Can’t some of us go with you, sir?” asked Bart, eagerly. - -“O, no. It’s better for you to stay. You had better remain together; -besides, the walk will be too rough. For my part, I wouldn’t go if I -could help it. But I must go. My work demands my presence at once. And -then--I really can’t stand this any longer. I could, perhaps, endure the -delay, but I can _not_ stand Captain Corbet and his--ehem!--his baby.” - -As he said this, he looked toward Captain Corbet, who was out of -hearing, and was standing discoursing, with a pleasant smile, to Bogud -and Jiggins. - -“Bruce, will you put me ashore?” asked Mr. Long. - -“Certainly, sir, with the greatest pleasure. But I’m very Sorry that -you’re going.” - -“I wish you’d let all of us go, sir,” said Arthur. - -Mr. Long shook his head. - -“No,” he said. “You see it will be easy enough for one to get a horse to -take him over, but so many could not do it. So I’ll go alone. I’ve been -there before, and I know my way.” - -“It will seem worse than ever when you go, sir,” said Bart. - -“O, you’ll have a wind before long. You won’t be home as soon as I am, -for the tide won’t let you; but, I dare say, you won’t be much behind -me. Take care of yourselves, and don’t try the boat again.” - -Saying this, Mr. Long went to Mr. Simmons, to announce his -determination. That gentleman was much surprised, and endeavored to -dissuade him. But Mr. Long was not to be dissuaded. Captain Corbet said -nothing. He merely elevated his eyebrows; and there was that in his face -which seemed to say, “There, I knew it. I’m not at all surprised. I’m -sorry for him, but not surprised. He’s capable of any piece of wildness. -He can’t appreciate babbies. What more would you have from such a -man?” All this his face fully expressed, but not a word of all this did -Captain Corbet say. - -Mr. Long shook hands with all the boys. Bruce was in the boat waiting, -and soon he jumped in. - -The line was cast, off, and Bruce sculled on over the smooth water -without much difficulty. The tide was running rapidly, but there was -plenty of coast before them; it was not far away, and before long the -boat had reached the beach. - -Mr. Long jumped out, and as his foot touched the shore, he gave a sigh -of relief. - -“Ah!” he exclaimed; “here I am at last.” - -“Which way are you going, sir?” asked Bruce. “Well, I’ll walk along the -shore for two or three miles, and after that I can find my way to a -road.” - -“You know your way I suppose, sir?” asked Bruce, anxiously. - -“O, yes. I’ve been here often. I know all about it. I’ll make very good -time if I don’t get attracted by the minerals. That’s my only danger -here. Good by.” - -He wrung Bruce’s hand, and walked off. Bruce then returned to the -schooner, and reached it without difficulty. The boys on board watched -Mr. Long for some time. The vessel was drifting down the strait, and he -was walking along the shore in an opposite direction. They watched his -black figure till he turned around a curve in the shore, and passed out -of sight. - -For some time the vessel continued to drift under the same -circumstances, without any signs of wind, or oven the prospect of a -friendly mud flat on which they, could be quietly and comfortably -stranded. This time they drifted below Spencer’s Island, and looked ont -into the Bay of Fundy with a vague fear of being borne away into its -waters, and carried off for immeasurable distances. But the tide soon -turned after they had reached this place; and though the dark form of -Ile Haute towered up gloomily from out the waters of the Bay of Fundy, -yet they came no nearer-to it. - -On the turn of the tide they drifted back once more. This gave them much -relief, for as long as they were within the Basin of Minas it did not -seem so bad. As they drifted along they came to the place where Mr. Long -had landed, and they watched anxiously to see if there were any signs of -him. They found none. - -“If we only had a glass,” said Bart. “Captain Corbet, haven’t you a -glass?” - -“Yes--a kind of a one.” - -“Where?” - -“It’s in the cabin.” - -“May I have it?” - -“O, yes.” - -Bart went down and looked for some time. At last he returned -disappointed. - -“1 can’t find any glass, Captain Corbet,” said he. - -“Why, it’s jest in front of yer nose,” said Captain Corbet. “Come down. -I’ll show you where it is.” - -Down went Bart after Captain Corbet, and, the latter pointed to the -wall. . - -“There,” said he. “I wonder you didn’t see it.” - -“Where?” asked Bart. - -“Where? Why, there,” said Captain Corbet; and saying this he put -his horny finger on a small triangular fragment of what was once a -looking-glass, which small triangular fragment was fastened to a post, -on one side of the cabin, with brass trunk nails. - -“There it is,” said Captain Corbet. “You don’t seem to have any eyes in -your head, though you’re sharp enough sometimes, gracious knows.” - -“That!” cried Bart. “That! Why, it’s a spyglass I want.” - -“A spy-glass no, yes. Wal, I hain’t got none.” - -“You haven’t any!” - -“No; never owned one in all my born days.” - -“That’s odd, too. I thought every sea captain had to have one.” - -“Wal, no. There ain’t no great use for sich. They’re a kind o’ luxury, -you see. I don’t have any call for them. There’s other machines, too, -that they talk about, sech as quadrupeds an’ sextons; but I never bother -my head about, ’em.” - -“Why, how do you manage to sail your schooner?” - -“How? Why, jest up sail an’ let her slide.” - -“But what do you do when you’re out of sight of land?” - -“Never git out of sight. Ef I should, I’d steer straight back for the -land agin.” - -“What do you do in the fog?” asked Bart. - -“The fog? I jest do the best I kin. Any ways, I don’t see what use a -sexton would be in a fog, nor a quadruped nuther. Then them sort o’ -con-sarns have to be worked by the sun. So, you see, they’re no manner -o’ use in these here waters, nor in no waters at all. People git along -jest as well without ’em. Why, here am I, an’ I bin sailin’ this forty -year, an’ never tetched a sexton nor a quadruped; and me bin all the way -to Bosting. Besides, did Noah make his vyge in the Ark with a quadruped? -No, _sir_. Did Solomon have one in the ship that he sailed to Ophir? -Agin I say, no, _sir_. So I conclude that what the prophets, an’ -patriarchs, an’ wise men of old,--an’ a darn sight better men than sea -captains are as they go these times;--what they did without, we can do -without.” - -“But you have a compass?” - -“Course I have.” - -“They didn’t have a compass in those days.” - -“Yes, they did.” - -“Excuse me--they didn’t have anything of the kind.” - -“Excuse _me_, young sir,--bein’ a man old enough, to be your feyther, -an’ a seafarin’ man, too, an’, what’s more, a man that reads his -Bible,--but they did.” - -“I should like to know how you make that out.” - -“Did you ever read Acts?” - -“Of course.” - -“Did you ever happen to hear tell of the vygo of the ‘postle Paul, young -sir?” - -“Yes; but what’s that got to do with it? You don’t mean to say that he -had a compass.” - -“That’s the very pint that I’m a drivin’ at.” - -“What! that the apostle Paul had a compass?” - -“Course he had.” - -“Why, the compass wasn’t known till the fourteenth century. Flavio -Gioja, of Amalfi, is the one that they say invented it.” - -“So that’s what they teach you over there at the Academy--is it?” said -Captain Corbet with a look that would have been one of scorn if it -hadn’t been so full of pity. “So that’s what they teach--is it? Wal! -wall wal! If I ever! I never did! However, I’ll show you at once what’s -the wuth, the terew wuth, of your lamin’, when it’s put fair an’ square -in opposition to facts. Look here now, an’ listen, an’ don’t forget. In -the account of that vyge, it says distindtly, ‘So we fetched-a compass.’ -What have you got to say to that, now? hey?” - -And Captain Corbet drew himself up, and watched the effect of this -startling piece of intelligence. - -[Illustration: 0293] - -Upon Bart the effect was instantaneous, though not of the kind which -Captain Corbet expected. A light broke in upon his mind, and a smile -burst forth, and spread like sunshine over his lately puzzled face. He -said nothing for some time, but looked away so as to take in the full -flavor of what he considered so good a thing. - -“O, yes,” said he at last. “I see. I understand. I never thought of that -before. I must let the fellows know I’ll tell them all at school, from -Dr. Porter down to the smallest boy in the primary department. And I’ll -let them all know that it was you that told me. They’ve all got an -idea that it was invented either by the Arabs, or the Greeks, or the -Italians; but now they shall hear Captain Corbet’s theory.” - -“Yes--do--do,” said-Captain Corbet, eagerly. - -“An’ tell them that _I_ told you. Tell Dr. Porter. I’d like to know what -the doctor’s got to say.” - -“Say! He’ll say nothing--he’ll be dumb. But I must hurry up. It’s -strange, too. I was sure you had a spy-glass. You had one in the boat -when you came after us the time we were aground.” - -“So we had, but it wan’t mine.” - -“Whose was it?” - -“Captain Pratt’s.” - -“O, then, that accounts for it. I’m sorry too. I hoped to be able to -find out where Mr. Long was.” - -“Mr. Long? Don’t bother about him. He’s all right. He’s among his -native rocks. A man like that; a man that’s a stranger to the charms -of a gentle smilin’ babby; a man that gets mad with others, who are -nat’rally pinin’ for their absent offspring--such a man has a heart that -is a rock, an’ had oughter make up his abode among rocks. I see now why -it is that he spends all his time a gatherin’ of ’em. Why, I told him -some of the most affectin’ things about my babby. But what did he say? -_He!_ He almost swore! Can any parient be willin’ to put his son to -be taught by a man like that--a man whose heart is as hard as a nether -milestone?” - -“He’s very kind to us,” said Bart. “All of the boys at school love Mr. -Long dearly.” - -“That ain’t the pint,” said Captain Corbet. “The pint is, how does he -feel about a babby? Doos he yearn over ’em? Doos he delight in their -little pooty ways? Doos he crow over ’em? Doos he nuss ’em an’ -dandle ’em? I jedge of a man that way, an’ by them there signs; an’ -I call that, by a long chalk, the most entirely jodgematical way of -readin’ an’ interpretatin’ human natur’. Read by that light, Mr. Long -ain’t a succumstance. He’s left us. I’m glad. Let him wander among the -rocks and stones of Blomidon!” - -With this, Captain Corbet turned away, not caring to pursue the subject -further. Bart went on deck again, to spread among his companions -Captain Corbet’s peculiar views on the subject of spy-glasses, sextants, -quadrants, and compasses. - -These new theories created an immense sensation; and whatever opinion -there may have been had before about the captain’s seamanship, there was -no question now as to the perfect originality of his views. - - - - -XXII. - -_Being jolly under creditable Circumstances.--Songs, Medleys, Choruses, -Cheers, Laughter, Speeches, Responses.--The Mud again.--Hard and -fast.--What’ll you do now, my Boy?_ - - -MR. LONG had gone from their gaze completely, and could be seen no -more. While trying to find him, the boys made conjectures as to where -he might be. Giving up all idea of his being on the beach, they imagined -him wending his solitary way far up the coast, or, perhaps, scaling the -mighty cliff itself in some more accessible place. Gradually the vessel -drifted farther and farther away, until at length it was far up in Minas -Basin. - -“Well, boys,” said Bart, “this is getting to be monotonous. We’re like -ferrymen, going forever between two points.” - -“Yes, or like the pendulum of a clock, vibrating always, backward and -forward.” - -“One more night of drifting is before us.” - -“More meals of pork and molasses.” - -“Or burnt Indian paste.” - -“Or smoky molasses candy.” - -“The worst of it is, that we have nothing to amuse ourselves with.” - -“It’s a pity we couldn’t start some game.” - -“Bart, tell a story.” - -“A story?” said Bart. “Who could tell a story under such circumstances?” - -“I don’t believe,” said Bruce, “that a calm was ever known to last so -long in the Basin of Minas. Was it, captain?” he added, appealing to -Captain Corbet, who had just emerged from the cabin. - -“Wal,” replied Captain Corbet, “it’s not usual to have a calm in the -month of May; still, we do-have ’em sometimes.” - -“I should rather think we had,” said Bart. - -“I’ve known ’em last a week,” said Captain Corbet, solemnly. - -“A week?” - -“Yes, a hull week; but that was in July. Still, there’s no knowin’. It -may be in May this year.” - -“Then we’ll have to go ashore in the boat tomorrow. I will. I’ll mutiny, -and start off.” - -So spoke Bart, and the rest all declared that they would do the same. - -“O, we’ll have wind to-night,” said Captain Corbet, in a tone of -vague encouragement. “Yes, yes, we must have wind to-night, or before -morn-in’. We’ve had about calm enough. You feel anxious, no deoubt, all -on ye,” he continued, with a superior smile; “but if you feel so, jedge -what I must feel--me, with, my babby. Why, every minute,--yes, every -mortial minute,--the voice of that there smilin’ babe is a-soundin’ in -my ears. Sometimes he says, ‘GGa-ga-ga,’ and sometimes ‘Da-da-da;’ and -sometimes the cunnin’ leetil human creetur emits a cry,--a favorite -one of his’n,--that sounds jest like ‘Bo-rax! Bo-rax! Bo-rax!’ Isn’t it -odd?” - -And he looked at the boys with that mild face of his, whereon was -intermingled an expression partly made up of a father’s affection, and -partly of tender enjoyment of his little cherub’s innocent ways. - -“And what does he mean by Borax?” asked Bruce. - -“What does he mean? Why, a’most everything. It’s a pet name he gives to -me, you know. That and ‘Ga-ga’--” - -“I suppose he doesn’t know the English language yet.” - -“No, he hain’t larned it yet; but he’s a-gettin’ on. Why, I could stand -here for hours and tell you words of his’n. He’s uncommon spry, too. -He--” - -“Bart,” cried Bruce, suddenly, “start up a song. Sing ‘Uncle Ned.’” - -At this Bart started up a song, which was a medley, made up of “Uncle -Ned” and “The Mermaid.” The first verse was as follows:-- - - “There was an ole nigger, and he sailed on the sea; - - And he lived not far from the land; - - And he had no wool on de top of his head, - - And a comb and a glass in his hand. - - Chorus. - - “O, the sto-o-o-o-o-o-o-ormy winds, how they blow! - - So take up de shubbel an’ de hoe, - - While we poor sailor-boys are climbin’ up aloft. - - He has gone whar de good niggers go--‘gers go--‘gers go-- - - He has gone whar de good niggers go.” - -This astonishing production was sung with uncommon energy and spirit. -At its close Bart retired below, while the others went on singing; and -after a short time he returned with a piece of paper in his hand, and a -triumphant smile on his face. - -“Hallo, Bart! what have you got there?” cried Bruce. . - -“It’s an original song,” said Bart. - -“By whom?” - -“Myself,” he replied, meekly. - -“Hurrah! Go it! Sing it! Give it to us!” - -“All right; but you must all join in the chorus.” - -“Of course. What’s the tune?” - -“‘Auld Lang Syne.’” - -“Go ahead, then, young feller! Propel! Shoot away! -Beady--present--fire!” - -Waiting for the noise to subside, Bart stood in the midst of them, and -after the cries had ceased, he began: - - “Should Capting Corbet be forgot, - - A-sailin’ o’er the sea! - - O, no! when we get back to school, - - We’ll often think of he. - - Choruss. - - “We’ll often think of he, my friends; - - We’ll often think of he. - - O, yes! when we get back to school, - - We’ll often think of he.” - -“What’s that?” cried Captain Corbet, with a smile of pleasure wreathing -his venerable face. “Why, it ain’t--why, railly--why, it is me, too! -Why, railly! An’ you made up all that? Wal, now, I call that rale cute. -I do, railly. On’y I do wish, sense you did take the trouble to make -up that there,--bein’ as your hand was in,--I wish you’d kinder added -a line interriducin’ the babby. We like to be kind o’ onseparable. It -seems kind of agin natur’ to separate us.” - -“All right. I’ll introduce anything,” said Bart. “Here, boys, I’ll give -you another chorus. - - ‘We’ll often think of he, my friends; - - We’ll often think of he; - - The capting and his schewner gay, - - Likewise his small ba-be-e-e-e-e.’” - -This new impromptu chorus was sung with still greater enthusiasm. -Captain Corbet was affected to tears. Emotion overpowered him. As soon -as he could muster strength to speak, he exclaimed,-- - -“You’ve onmanned me--you have, railly. The mention of that blessed babby -kind o’ took away all my strength. But I’ll reward you, boys. When we -get back, I’ll make you all come up, and introduce you all to the babby -himself,--_sometime when the old woman’s away, you know,_” he added, -mysteriously. - -“I will now occupy the time by continuing the hymn,” said Bart, -solemnly. Whereupon he proceeded: - - “I love to go to Blomidon, - - Its beauty for to feel; - - But I’d prefer a better fare - - Than pork and Indian meal. - - Chorus. - - “Than pork and Indian meal, my friends; - - Than pork and Indian meal.-- - - O, I’d prefer a better fare - - Than pork and Indian meal.” - -This was sung earnestly and with very deep feeling. The recollection of -their melancholy condition caused a mild pathos to be infused into the -tones of all. Some of them seemed to be shedding tears. At any rate, -they held handkerchiefs to their eyes. - -The next verse: - - “I love to sail on Minas Bay, - - Its beauty for to see; - - To hunt for clams among the sands, - - And put them into me. - - CHorus. - - “And put them into me, my friends; - - And put them into me. - - To hunt for clams among the sands, - - And put them into me.” - -The mild melancholy that characterized the last chorus here changed into -a livelier note, expressive of greater cheerfulness. - -The next verse: - - “Pratt’s Cove it has the biggest clams - - That ever mortal saw; - - But when we hunt for clams again, - - We mustn’t eat them raw. - - CHorus. - - “We mustn’t eat them raw, my friends; - - We mustn’t swallow them raw. - - O, clams are good for human food, - - But we mustn’t eat them raw.” - -This was sung energetically, yet in a dignified manner. The chorus was -intended to convey a wholesome piece of advice to those who might -happen to be in need of it,--Pat, for instance,--and so it was sung with -dignity; at the same time, the energy with which it was rendered was -admirably adapted to enforce the advice and carry it home to the heart -and conscience of the hearer. - -The next verse: - - “We’ve got molasses for our food, - - It came from Tri-ni-dad; - - And when to candy it is boiled, - - It really isn’t bad. - - Chorus, - - “It really isn’t bad, my friends; - - It isn’t very bad. - - Molasses, boiled, to candy turns,’ - - And really isn’t bad.” - -A greater degree of liveliness prevailed here at the celebration of the -only eatable thing among the stores. There was an intention to do honor -to the molasses, and honor was accordingly done. - -The next verse: - - “Three cheers for Bogud, Billymack, - - Three cheers for all the crew,-- - - For Jiggins, Sammy, Muclcle, Pat, . - - And three for Johnny Blue! - - Chorus. - - Three cheers for Johnny Blue, my friends, - - Three cheers for Johnny Blue,-- - - For Jiggins, Sammy, Muckle, Pat, - - And three for Johnny Blue!” - -Immense enthusiasm. Surprise on the part of all the boys whose names -were thus so unexpectedly “wedded to song.” Recovering from their -surprise, each one jumped up, placed his hand on his heart, and -acknowledged the compliment by a low bow; after which the song was sung -again; after which there came more bows; and it would have gone on thus, -with alternate bowing and singing, till the present time, had not the -boys themselves felt overpowered, and demanded another verse. - -The next verse: - - “Three cheers for all the boys on board; - - For Corbet three times three; - - And thirty more for the jolly black flag - - Of the ‘B. O. W. C.’! - - Chorus. - - “The ‘B. O. W. C.’ my friends, - - The ‘B. O. W. C.’ - - Ever so many more for the jolly black flag - - Of the ‘ B. O. W. C.’!” - -This last chorus was sung with a vehemence, an ardor, and an enthusiasm -that are absolutely indescribable. It included all, and identified all, -in the most delicate manner, with the “B. O. W. C.” It was sung over and -over, and over yet again, accompanied with any quantity of cheers for -everything under the sun. The special allusion to Corbet, in the last -verse, elicited a fresh display of emotion from that venerable and -highly-impressible party. He did not say much, however. He merely went -round among the boys, and shook hands most warmly with all of them, one -by one. He asked each one about his father, his mother, his brothers -and sisters, and his uncles and aunts. He asked their full names, their -ages, and the number of their blood relations. He then made a public -address to them, in which he freely offered, at any time, to take any -of them, or all of them, on a cruise anywhere, at a moment’s warning. -Finally, he reiterated his offer to introduce his babby to them all. -This formed a climax. Beyond this he could not go. And there, naturally -and inevitably, his eloquent oration ended. - -So passed the time. And when you take into consideration the solemn fact -that all this time they were drifting, that the sea was smooth, that -there wasn’t a breath of wind, that there was no prospect of getting -home, or anywhere else, for that matter,--you will come to the -conclusion that these boys were jolly under creditable circumstances. -And you will be right in that conclusion; for it was in the very face -of calms, strong tides, empty larders, wanderings at sea, famine, and -privations of all kinds, that these boys stood up and sang their song. - -In this sense it became not a mere song of jollity or of idle sport. -It was more. It was the song of the unconquered soul. It was a defiance -hurled full in the face of Fortune. - -The evening passed. The shades of night came down. It was dark, and -it grew darker. Until late, the sounds of song, of laughter, and of -merriment, came forth and resounded through the night. At length all was -still. All on board had descended to their couches, and were wrapped in -profound slumber. - -The boy who awaked first in the morning gave such a shout that all the -others were roused at once. - -What was it? - -What! An instant told them all. Down through the hatchway there came a -blast of wind strong and cool, and full of sea salt. Above, they could -see the sail distended to its utmost, while higher up the clouds were -scudding across the sky. Below, the vessel was lying far over, as -it yielded to the wind; and her pitching and tossing, together with the -dash of waves against her bows, told all that she was moving swiftly -through the water. - -They hurried up to the deck. - -Far around them was the blue sea, now tossing into white-capped waves. -A fresh, strong wind was blowing over the water, and it was fair. On the -right rose Blomidon from out the foam that gathered at its base; on the -left the water extended till it was lost in the distance amid the haze -that hung over the low-lying shore. Behind them lay the Five Islands, -and all that water over which they had so long been drifting. The vessel -was heading straight to Grand Pré, and was tearing her way through the -water as she had never done before within the experience of any of her -present passengers. - -Joy reigned supreme. Loud cheers and cries of delight burst forth. - -“Why, captain,” said Bart, “I. began to think that the Antelope couldn’t -sail at all.” - -“Can’t she, though? O, she isn’t a bad sailor when she’s got a wind dead -fair like this.” - -“When’ll we get to Grand Pré?” - -“Wal, that’s difficult to say,” said the captain, thoughtfully. - -“Why, you don’t mean to say that there is any danger of the wind -stopping now, or changing?” - -“O, no; there’s no danger of that.” - -“Well, what is there?” - -“Why, we can’t get to the wharf.” - -“Why not?” - -“It’ll be low tide when we get there.” - -“Low tide!” repeated Bart, in consternation; “and how far will we be -from the wharf?” - -“O, miles; and that isn’t the worst of it. You’ll have the Cornwallis -River between you and Grand Pré.” - -Bart said no more, but retired to convey this disheartening intelligence -to his companions. They talked over it thoughtfully and with serious -faces. - -The vessel went on. The tide was against them, but the wind was strong -and fair, and blew with undiminishing power. Looking toward the shore, -they could see that their progress was excellent. - -Nearer they came, and nearer, until at last they saw before them a -vast extent of mud flats, beyond which lay a low ridge all green with -verdure; and they knew it as the dike of Grand Pré. Beyond this again -ascended the hills, with the white village at the base, and on the slope -the conspicuous form of the Academy, with its broad portico and lofty -cupola. . - -“Where are you going now, captain? You can’t anchor. Is there a port -here to run the schooner into?” - -“Nary port.” - -“What’ll you do? Surely you won’t drift off again?” - -“Drift? No, sir.” - -“How will you manage?” - -“How? Why, there’s only one thing to do; and that is, to run her right -straight in on to a mud flat.” - -As he spoke, he looked steadily forward, and gave the tiller a pull -to starboard. The schooner turned slightly. The next instant it ran -squarely upon the mud flat, and stuck there, hard and fast. - - - - -XXIII. - -_A wild Undertaking.--A Race for Life.--The lost Boot.--The -Quicksands.--The Isle of Safety.--The Mud Gulch.--Crossing the Abyss of -Mud.--Bruce’s Doldrum.--Two forlorn Figures.--Rapturous Welcome.--Speech -by the Grand Panjandrum._ - -THERE they were on the mud flat. It was a situation in which the B. -O. W. C. had been before, but experience had not made it any the more -pleasant to them. - -“We’ve done it before,” said Bruce, “and why shouldn’t we do it again?” - -“So I say,” remarked Arthur. “It’s a great deal farther,” said Phil, -“but in my opinion it isn’t half so bad as the other one.” - -“Of course it isn’t,” said Tom. “The tide is leaving us rapidly, and -we’ll be able to jump out upon the mud, and not up to our necks in -water, as we did the last time.” - -“And so we needn’t prepare to fight with shovel-mouth sharks,” said -Phil. - -“The fact is,” said Bart, “it’s going to be a difficult job, and harder -than the last one, perhaps. We’ve got a couple of miles to go, instead -of so many hundred yards. We must face that fact before leaving.” - -“We know that very well,” said Phil. - -“You see there is Grand Pré just in front of us.” - -“Yes.” - -“Well, we can’t go there, because between us and that place is the -Cornwallis River, which just now is an abyss of mud, with a strong -stream running at the bottom. So we’ll have to make an angle, and go up -there toward the right, and go in a straight line to Cornwallis Bridge.. -It will be two miles to the grass land, and another one to the bridge. -So we’ll have two miles of mud.” - -“I don’t believe the mud is any different from what we found in the -other place.” - -“It may not be,” said Bruce, “yet there may be air-holes. We’ve got so -far to go that we may find almost anything--air-holes, quicksands, or -anything else. Still, I don’t believe that we’ll meet with any.” - -“Well, let’s wait till the tide gets down to the bows, and then start,” - said Tom. - -With this the boys prepared for their journey. These preparations -consisted in nothing but getting some stout sticks, which they made by -splitting up a board, and smoothing each piece with a knife. After this -they informed Mr. Simmons of their intention. He looked aghast, and then -told them that they would get too muddy. - -At this they laughed, and said that they were covered with mud from -their many experiences in the voyage, and couldn’t be much worse. So Mr. -Simmons looked at them from head to foot, and then at himself. By this -he discovered that the boys were in a comfortably muddy condition, and -what was more, that he, Mr. Simmons, he himself, was decorated with -many mud marks, which sadly marred the beauty of his black attire. This -discovery filled him with such horror that he hurried below, where the -sound of a brush in violent exercise showed the boys that he was trying -to eradicate the stains, so as to prepare himself for a solemn entry -into the village. He did not appear on deck again. - -Captain Corbet, however, on learning their proposal, had much more to -say about it. - -He listened with staring eyes, and then declared that they all were -crazy. - -“Crazy? Why, ye’re mad as March hares! Do ye know that that there mud is -full of air-holes, an’ inhospitable for man an’ beast? Horses air lost -there every year. So air knows likewise. People shun it. Death lurks -there. I wouldn’t go there for all the gold in Californy There’s -quicksands, and there’s air-pots, and there’s holes of all kinds, -there’s deep gulps that you can’t cross no how.” - -“But did you ever hear of an accident?” - -“Course I have. My feyther told me onst about a neighbor of his’n that -lost a friend down hereabouts. He was found next day lying on the shore -up there--thrown up by the tide. Besides, my wife’s ma told me of people -that’s been a-missin’, an’ what it’s strongly suspected that they kind -o’ strayed down here, and got drownded. What d’ye say to that?” - -“O, it’s all the same. There are five of us. We’ll help one another.” - -“Ah, ye’ll help one another! Yes, but to sartin ruination. Why, see -here. Look at me. I’m more anxious, a hundred times, to got ashore -than you be. I’m a feyther. I’ve got a pinin’ babby that I’m a-yearnin’ -after. I’ve got a kind of homesick feel-in’, that never leaves me, arter -him; ’ee bessed chicken, so it was! But do I go an’ resk my life? Do -I throw myself away? Do I walk over quicksands, an’ air-holes, an’ mud -gullies? Not I. I stand here like a man, an’ wait.” - -“All right, captain; we’ll tell them you’re comin’,” said Bart, stepping -to the bows. - -By this time the tide had lowered, so that they could get out from the -vessel on the mud. One by one they descended. They found the mud soft, -of course, but not very much so. - -“O, boys,” cried Captain Corbet, “come back!” - -“All right!” cried Bruce. “Come, boys, if we stand, we’ll stick in the -mud. Hurry along!” - -“Bo-o-oys! come back,” wailed Captain Corbet. “If you get harmed, I -can’t follow you to help you.” - -“Good by.” - -“Bo-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-oys! O, Bo-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-oys!” wailed Captain -Corbet, for the last time, as the boys went off. But this time they gave -no response. He stood in silence, watching them, for a long, long time, -with deep anxiety. The other boys also looked after them with not a -doubt in the minds of any of them but that they would come back. - -Meanwhile the boys walked on upon their dangerous way. - -Perhaps their very ignorance of that danger saved them from it. They -walked on in a straight line, knowing nothing of places which the people -about believed to be dangerous; and as they found the outset easy, they -expected all the rest would be the same. The mud was like that which -they had met with before--soft at the surface, but hard beneath, so that -they sank in a little distance at every step, but nevertheless, found -a firm foothold. The mud was so soft, and the foothold beneath so firm, -that their feet were not very badly clogged. They did not find it so -difficult as walking over clay roads after they had been soaked with -rains, and cut up by heavy teams. - -They walked on rapidly, in as straight a line as possible, laughing and -shouting, declaring that mud fiats were slandered, and that there was -much worse walking on many a country road. - -At length the mud grew softer, and the bottom was not so near the -surface. To walk over this, even at a rapid pace, was difficult; for -where the foot was planted at full length, it would sink so that it was -difficult to extricate it. A swifter pace was necessary. - -“Are you tired, Phil?” asked Bruce. - -“No,” said Phil; and, indeed, he seemed as fresh as any of them. - -“Because we’ll have to go faster,” said Bruce. “Come, now, boys--Indian -trot!” - -Away they went at the peculiar pace known by that name,--the body bent -forward, and the fore part of the foot touching the ground with its -elastic tread, moving at that slow, steady, easy trot which is faster -and lighter than a walk, and but little more fatiguing to those who have -the knack of it. This carried them on very well for some considerable -distance farther, and on looking back they began to congratulate -themselves on the distance which they had already traversed. Ere long -the grass-covered marsh was within sight--the place where danger ended, -and progress was easier. But between them and that place there still lay -difficulties which they knew not of. - -Suddenly as they ran on, they were arrested by a cry from Phil. They -turned instantly, and were horrified at the sight that met their eyes. -Phil, being the smallest and weakest, had fallen behind, and, being out -of breath, had loitered a few paces so as to recover, thinking that he -would catch up. - -Feeling a pain in his side, he had stopped to fasten his belt tighter -around his waist, and without thinking he had stood motionless for a -minute. In that minute his feet had sunk in the treacherous soil. In his -sudden fright at this discovery, he had cried out, and made a desperate -effort to extricate himself. With a jerk he had drawn forth one foot, -but the other had sunk in up to his knee. And this was the position in -which he stood when the others turned. - -Another minute and they were by his side, pulling at him. But as they -pulled, each one found himself sinking. - -“Here, boys, this won’t do,” cried Bart. “Phil, give me your hand. Boys, -form a line behind me, one after another. Now let’s catch hold of one -another. Now, let’s keep moving backward and forward, quickly, #so as -not to stand still. Now, then, pull!” - -Backward and forward the line of boys, thus rapidly formed, went -swaying, pulling Phil as they did so. The clinging mud yielded, and Phil -was slowly dragged forth. But his boot was left behind. - -“Never mind the boot,” cried Bart. “Come on as you are,--one shoe off, -and the other one on, tol de roi de rido, my son John! Hurrah! Phil, go -ahead of me, and I’ll guard the rear.” - -All this time, while Bart was speaking, they were running on, Phil -limping with his booted and bootless feet. . - -“Never mind, Phil! we’ll soon get to a place where you can take off the -other boot,” said Bart, encouragingly. - -And now began the tug. Their run had been a long one, and their -exertions excessive. All of them were out of breath, and panting -heavily. The distance still before them was great; but they dared -not stop; they dared not even pause for am instant, or slacken their -progress in any degree. Phil was most exhausted, but he toiled on with -desperate exertions. The memory of his lost boot showed him his danger. -That boot left behind remained as a terror, which drove him on. - -On and still on. Fainter grew the boys, but they dared not stop. All of -them were panting, and laboring heavily, but no relief was near. Far -off still lay the marsh with its grass--a fearful distance to those so -exhausted, and still compelled to labor so hard. - -“I don’t know how much longer I can stand this,” gasped Tom. - -“You _must_ stand it! Don’t stop, for your life!” cried Bruce. - -The others said nothing. To speak would be but to waste their precious -breath, which they were losing only too rapidly. - -On and on. Still the soft mud lay beneath them, and an awful fear came -to some of them that it was getting softer. - -The fear was soon realized. - -Softer and softer it grew, and deeper sank their feet. Had this place -only been found at an earlier period, they could have returned, or they -would have had strength to struggle on; but now it came in the hour of -their extremest exhaustion. It was a hollow in the mud, somewhat lower -than the surrounding surface. - -“We can’t go through this,” said Bruce; and he pointed to the centre -of the hollow, which looked fearfully soft and liquid. “Let’s go around -it;” and turning rapidly, he started off toward the right. The boys said -nothing. They floundered deep in the mud,-they panted, they gasped, they -moaned in the despairing efforts which they made. - -“I’ll lie down,” gasped Phil. “I--won’t--sink--“. - -“On, on! Never! We’ll all have to die if you stop.” - -These words came from Bart, who, exhausted as he was, caught Phil’s arm, -and dragged him on. - -At that moment Tom fell. - -“It’s all up with me, boys,” he moaned. “Leave me. Save yourselves.” - -Bruce said nothing. He snatched him up out of the mud, and pulled him -along, while at this fresh exertion his whole frame quivered, and his -feet sank deeper. - -How long could this last? - -Tom could scarcely keep his feet. Phil could hardly keep upright, and -move his legs. Arthur could barely stumble along. Bart and Bruce bore. -it best, and could help the others still. - -But for how long? - -A shout of joy came from Bruce. - -“Hurrah! Look there!” he cried. Tom raised himself by a last effort, -and turned his feeble eyes to where Bruce pointed. He saw, at a little -distance, a green patch in the mud. - -It was marsh grass! - -At that instant all recognized it. The sight of it brought fresh -strength to their despairing energies. It gave new life to Tom and Phil. -A few steps more, and the soft mud grew harder; and soon after they were -all standing on the patch of marsh grass. - -No sooner had they reached this place, than they all flung themselves -down upon the mud, out of which the coarse grass grew. For some time not -a word was spoken. All lay there breathing heavily. Looking back, they -could see the wide extent of mud flats which they had traversed. -The schooner was far away, and those on board could no longer be -distinguished. The soft spot in which they had been wallowing, and out -of which they had found their way, spread for a great distance, not only -between them and the schooner, but also on one side. Between them and -Cornwallis there appeared to be a firmer surface, like that which they -had found on leaving the schooner. Besides this, there were patches of -grass interspersed here and there, like islands, in this sea of mud. -Here they might find resting-places if they were again exhausted. The -spot on which they lay was the outermost of these. - -They did not hurry away. They needed a good long breathing-time, and -they took it. Phil took off his remaining boot, declaring that if he -had only got it off before, he would not have been so exhausted. He -preferred walking over the mud barefoot, he said. This seemed to the -others a good idea, and they all took off their boots and stockings, so -as to pass over the mud more lightly. - -At length, after about half an hour, they all rose, and resumed their -journey. The mud spread away before them; and though there were patches -of grass at intervals, yet the real marsh land itself did not come -within half a mile of them. This distance would have to be traversed -before they could reach the nearest verge. And now, keeping their eyes -fixed upon the Cornwallis shore, they all set out afresh. - -Their progress was easy, such as it was when they first set out, with -this difference, that their goal was near, and resting-places frequent. -Nearer and nearer they came to the marsh land; nearer and nearer -still,--and now they were close to it,--and now they had just reached -it,--when suddenly, just as they seemed to touch it, there yawned -between them and that green inviting goal a deep crevice, the course of -some sea current, at the bottom of which trickled, even now, some water, -which probably came from one of the numerous drains of the dike land -before them. The sides sloped down at an angle of forty-five degrees, -and consisted of the softest mud, which seemed by its appearance ready -to ingulf at once any one who might step upon it. To cross here was -impossible. It could not be even ventured upon. - -The ground at the edge was firm enough for them to stand and survey -the situation. On the left the gully seemed to go toward the Cornwallis -River, on the right it seemed to approach the land. Supposing that it -came from the dikes, and that it would grow narrower if they ascended -in that direction, they turned off toward the right. They found their -surmise correct. After walking for a half mile, the gully had become -much narrower, and had diminished from a width of thirty feet and a -depth of twelve, to a width of ten and a depth of six. But here they -found themselves at a fork, where the gully that came from the dike land -divided “itself, one part going toward the Cornwallis River, and the -other far down through the mud flat toward the bay. To go around it, or -in any way avoid it, was impossible. It was necessary to cross it at all -hazards. - -“We must do it, boys,” said Bart. “So here goes.” - -Saying this, he threw over his boots. Then he went back for some -distance. Then he rushed forward, and springing from the edge of the -bank, he shot through the air, and landed on the other side. - -“That’s more than I can do,” said Tom. “I’ve got to wade it.” - -“Nor can I,” said Phil. - -“Go it, Arthur,” said Bruce. - -Arthur went back, and took a run like Bart, and jumped. But he fell two -feet short. His feet sank deep into the soft mud. He struggled for a -moment, and falling forward, dug his elbows into the top of the bank. -Bart seized him, and after some violent struggles he was free. - -After this all the boots were thrown over. Bruce encouraged Phil and -Tom. - -“Now, boys, go it. I’ll wait here to help you.” - -“But we can’t jump.” - -“Arthur and I will go down on this side, and Bruce on the other, and -help you,” said Bart; and he descended at the same time, followed by -Arthur, while Bruce descended the opposite side. Their feet sank in for -some distance, and then found bottom. - -Phil then went down, and gave a wild leap, and his feet just cleared -the middle. For a moment he floundered, but struggled onward, and caught -Bart’s hand. Another minute, and he was safe over. - -“I’ve not got much strength left, boys,” said Tom; “but I’ll do what I -can.” - -“Steady now--wait,” said Bart, “let me get a little farther down. -Arthur, give me your hand.” Saying this, Bart descended a little -farther. - -Tom ran down, his feet sinking deep. Near the middle he tried to leap -over, but his feet sank so that his leap failed. He fell short, and his -advancing foot struck the very middle of that soft pudding in the bed of -the gully. He sank to his middle at once, struggling, and panting, and -throwing himself forward. Deeper and deeper he sank. It was an awful -moment. At length a last violent effort brought him a little nearer. -Bart dropped Arthur’s hand, and clutched that which was despairingly -outstretched by Tom. At the same moment Arthur caught Bart, and they -dragged at their sinking companion. For some time they did nothing -toward extricating him. - -But now with a bound Bruce had sprung across, and hurried to their -assistance. Going down close by Bart, he caught Tom’s other hand. Then, -with all their strength united, they pulled. Their own feet sank deep, -but they thought not of that. Tom was coming out. He was out. He was -saved! - -Drawing out their own feet then, they helped Tom up to the top of the -bank, and there they rested once more. Tom was not exhausted, but -only weakened, and a few minutes were sufficient for him to rally. -So, without saying much about this last adventure, they resumed their -journey. - -There lay the marsh right before them at last. There, too, not far away, -rose a dike, beyond which were the dike lands. Their perilous journey -was at last approaching an end. Soon they were on the marsh, where the -coarse grass was now in its early spring growth, and not high enough to -impede their progress. A short journey through this brought them to the -dike. It was only a fe\v feet in height. They climbed to the top, and -looked around. There was the Cornwallis River about half a mile away, -and there, farther up, the bridge that crossed it. The coarse stubble of -the grass hurt their feet, so that they walked along the top of the -dike toward the river. This walk was easy and pleasant; and after their -severe journey, it was even delightful. In this way they went on, till -at last they reached the bank of the river, when they turned and walked -up the edge toward the bridge. - -At first the bed of the river was, as Bart had said, a vast abyss of -soft mud, through which ran a swift stream, flowing at the bottom of -this abyss; but as they walked on, they came at length to a place where -the mud was intermixed with gravel, which extended down to the water, -and up on the other side. Here Bruce stopped, and looked down, and then -across. . - -“What’s the matter?” asked the others. - -“O, nothing. I’m thinking about trying to cross.” - -“To cross! You’ll never get across,” cried Phil. - -“Yes,” said Bart. “It can be done. I’ll try it if you will, Bruce. You -see it isn’t all soft mud here, but the gravel goes down, and up the -other side. I don’t believe it’s deep, either.” - -“Well, if it’s over our heads, we can swim a little.” - -“But see how strong the current is,” said Tom. “It will carry you off.” - -“O, it can’t carry us far,” said Bruce. “I’m in for it. You see, boys, -it’s too aggravating to look across the river here, and see the Academy -close by on the other side, hardly more than a mile or so away, and then -turn off for a four or five mile walk around. You fellows had better go -up to the bridge, and get a wagon, and drive round. Bart and 1 will try -it here, at any rate. If we can’t get across, we’ll follow you.” - -Without listening to any further remonstrances, Bruce and Bart descended -the slope. The bed was very wide and deep, though now nearly empty, -and they did not know how deep the water might be that ran there. They -expected to ford it. The other boys stood on the bank watching them with -intense interest. - -The gravel, mixed with mud, formed a good footing; and Bruce and Bart -stopped here for a time, and put their boots on, so that if they had to -swim they might not be impeded with bundles. - -The water was running swiftly by. It seemed wider now than it did at the -top of the bank. But they did not hesitate. In they went side by side, -Bruce on the right, and Bart below him on the left. The water grew -deeper and deeper. It came up to their waists, then up to their armpits. -Bart could not possibly stem it a moment longer. He was lifted from his -feet, and borne on. - -Those waiting at the top of the bank felt their hearts stop beating as -they looked. - -But Bart’s head was above water, and he struck out bravely for the -opposite shore. He knew he would not have far to swim, for he had -already gone nearly half way when he was swept off his feet. The current -still bore him down, but his own efforts were dragging him to the -opposite shore at every stroke. - -After Bart had lost his footing, Bruce still walked on. He held himself -so that he could resist the current to some extent. But at last he, too, -lost his footing, and was swept after Bart. He struck out strongly; and -while carried down by the current, he, too, drew nearer the opposite -shore. - -Bart had just touched bottom, and sprang up, with the water scarce -higher than his waist, and looked around for Bruce. As he looked, he -caught sight of Bruce’s face. It was turned toward him in agony, close -by him, and but a little behind. Two hands were flung out, and with a -gasp and a groan Bruce sank. - -For an instant Bart stood petrified with horror. A wild thought of -sharks flashed through his mind. But the next instant he had grasped -Bruce, and was dragging him half fainting, still gasping, out of the -water. In a few minutes they were on the bank, where they both sat down. - -“It was a--a palpitation--of the--the heart,” gasped Bruce. “I’ve -felt--queer.--ever since that--affair--on the--the cliff.” - -“Yes. You’ll have to keep quiet, Bruce, for some months to come. You see -you’ve been exerting yourself tremendously to-day, and this last thing -has been too much. You’ve got to look out, for a thing like this is not -to be trifled with.” - -By this time the other boys had rushed down, and were on the opposite -side halloing, and asking what was the matter. - -“O, nothing--a doldrum of Bruce’s,” cried Bart. “‘He’s all right now.” - -“All right!” said Bruce, lifting up his pale face, and nodding. - -“You hurry up, boys,” said Bart. “Get a horse at the bridge, and drive -home.” - -Upon this the boys left, and went to the bridge. After about a quarter -of an hour, Bruce felt able to start. They ascended the bank slowly; and -after reaching the dike land, they went across in a straight line -for the Academy. They walked slowly at first, but Bruce regained his -strength more and more at every step. - -At length they reached the gateway of the Academy grounds. Wet to the -skin, handkerchiefs round their heads, with their clothes ragged, and -plastered with mud from head to foot, so that hardly any of the original -color was visible, these two forlorn figures attracted universal -attention; and soon all the small boys were around them cheering, and -shouting, and asking about the schooner. - -Out came Mr. Long, who had arrived the previous evening without -accident. - -Out came Dr. Porter, astonishment in his face. - -Out came every inhabitant of the Academy and its precincts, all making -inquiries. - -And, last of all, out came Solomon, with an enormous white collar -standing up above his ears, and,-- - -“O, de gracious! O, de sakes alive, now! What’s dis dat dis ole nigga -does see! You gwine away whar glory takes you, an’ back agin to be de -light of an ole cuss’s life! An’ whar’s all de rest ob all dem bressed -chil’en? O, dis de-lightful day an’ hour! An’ you wet as ebber wet kin -be by failin’ in de briny wave! Bress dis old nigga’s heart! but whar -you git all dat mud from? An’ me hopin’ an’ prayin’ fur dis glorious -time! What’s become ob all de Wenebble Breddren? Heah comes de Wenebble -Patrick, an’ de Wenebble Wodden, wid de ‘Gran’ Panjydanderum in de -shinin’ train! O, dis day an’ hour!” - -And with exclamations like these, poured forth with amazing volubility, -Solomon walked along backward before them, and his voice died away, in -the distance to a prolonged and unintelligible hubble-bubble. - -About an hour afterward Arthur, Phil, and Tom drove up, and were -received in a very similar manner. If the “B. O. W. C.” liked to create -a sensation, they certainly had reason to be satisfied. - -Mr. Simmons, with the rest of the boys, did not get to the Academy till -late in the day. - -But long before that, in fact, at high noon, Solomon received the “B. O. -W. C.” in the diningroom. They had luxuriated in the bath, and Solomon -had prepared for them the banquet. He surpassed himself. His genius had -invented new dishes expressly for the occasion, and the “B. O. W. C.” - ate, and were refreshed. - -THE END - - - - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE "B. O. W. C." *** - -***** This file should be named 56231-0.txt or 56231-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - https://www.gutenberg.org/5/6/2/3/56231/ - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - |